Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Approval Date
Effective Date *
Remark
Corrigenda 1 Corrigenda 2 Corrigenda 3 Corrigenda 4 Rule Change Notice 1 Rule Change Notice 2 Corrigenda 5
15 May 2006 1 April 2006 29 Jan 2007 1 April 2006 19 July 2007 1 April 2006 3 Sept 2007 1 April 2006 30 Nov 2007 1 April 2008 25 Feb 2008 1 July 2008 TB TB
1 Jan 2006 Edition 1 Jan 2006 edition 1 Jan 2006 edition 1 Jan 2006 edition 1 Jan 2006 edition 1 Jan 2006 edition 1 Jan 2006 edition TB 1 Jan 2006 edition 1 July 2008 consolidated edition 1 July 2008 consolidated edition
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
30 Jan 2009
TB
TB
* For effective date, refer to the implementation statements of the relevant Corrigenda / Rule Changes.
Page 1 of 1
19 May 2006
Corrigenda 1
May 2006
Reference
Ch 3, Sec 2, [2.1.3]
Explanation
Editorial correction
extra.
extra.
Ch 3, Sec 2, [3.2]
Ch 3, Sec 3, Tab 1
Transverse bulkhead
Upper part (4) Lower stool sloping and top plate Other parts
Transverse bulkhead
Upper part (4) Lower stool: sloping plate, vertical plate and top plate Other parts
Page 1/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Ch 3, Sec 6, [6.5.2]
Explanation
Sentence stated twice in the requirement.
required on the shell plating. The ends of the bilge keel are to be sniped as shown in Fig.18 or rounded with large radius. The ends are to be located in way of transverse bilge stiffeners inside the shell plating and the ends of intermediate flat are not to be located at the block joints. The bilge keel and the intermediate flat are to be made of steel with the same yield stress as the one of the bilge strake. The bilge keel with a length greater than 0.15L is to be made with the same grade of steel as the one of bilge strake. The net thickness of the intermediate flat is to be equal to that of the bilge strake. However, this thickness may generally not be greater than 15 mm. Scallops in the bilge keels are to be avoided.
Ch 4, Sec 3, Figure 1
Figure 1: Sign conventions for shear forces Q and bending moments MSW, MWV, MH
Figure 1: Sign conventions for shear forces Q and bending moments MSW, MWV, MWH
Editorial correction
For the positive hydrodynamic pressure at the waterline (in load cases H1, H2, F1, R1, R2 and P1), the hydrodynamic pressure PW,C at the side
2
For the positive hydrodynamic pressure at the waterline (in load cases H1, H2, F2, R1, R2 and P1), the hydrodynamic pressure PW,C
Editorial correction
at the side above waterline is given (see Fig 5), in kN/m2, by:
.
Ch4, Sec5, [1.6.2]
cases H1, H2, F2, R1, R2, and P2), the hydrodynamic pressure PW,C, cases H1, H2, F1, R1, R2 and P2), the hydrodynamic pressure
Editorial correction
PW,C, under the waterline is given (see Fig 5), in kN/m2, by: .
Page 2/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Ch 4, Sec 6, Symbols
Explanation
Editorial correction
150 m and above the maximum density from the loading manual for ships having a length less than 150 m
Ch 4, Sec 6, [1.1.2] where: h1 : Vertical distance obtained from the following formula, see Fig 2. .. VTS : Total volume of transverse stools at bottom of transverse bulkheads within the concerned cargo hold length
H.
of 150 m and above the maximum density from the loading manual for ships having a length L less than 150 m
where: h1 : Vertical distance, in m, obtained from the following formula,
This
volume excludes the part of hopper tank passing through the transverse bulkhead. h2 : Bulk cargo upper surface, depending on y, given by: ............................
through the transverse bulkhead. h2 : Bulk cargo upper surface, in m, depending on y, given by:
............................
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
The requirements in [2] to [4] are applicable to ships having a length L of 150 m and above.
1.2
1.2
2.1.2
2.1.2
In addition to [2.1.1], for BC-A, BC-B, and BC-C ships, the loading
In addition to [2.1.1], for BC-A, BC-B and BC-C ships, the loading
Page 3/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Ch 4, Sec 8, [2.2.2] 2.2.2
Explanation
Editorial corrections
In addition to [2.2.1], for BC-A, BC-B, and BC-C ships, the following
Ch 4, Sec 8, [3.1.2]
3.1.2
3.1.2
For BC-A, BC-B, and BC-C ships, the loading instrument is .......
For BC-A, BC-B and BC-C ships, the loading instrument is .......
Editorial corrections
Ch 4, Sec 8, [3.2.2]
3.2.2
3.2.2
In addition, for BC-A, BC-B, and BC-C ships, the approval .......
In addition, for BC-A, BC-B and BC-C ships, the approval .......
Editorial corrections
Ch 4, App 1, [1.1.1]
and above.
L and above.
Editorial corrections
Ch 4, App 1, [2.2.2]
The maximum permissible cargo mass and the minimum required cargo mass corresponding to draught for loading/unloading conditions in harbour may be increased or decreased by 15% of the maximum permissible mass for the cargo hold in seagoing condition. However, maximum permissible mass is in no case to be greater than the maximum permissible cargo mass at designed maximum load draught for each cargo hold.
The maximum permissible cargo mass and the minimum required cargo mass corresponding to draught for loading/unloading conditions in harbour may be increased or decreased by 15% of the maximum permissible mass at the maximum draught for the cargo
Editorial correction
hold in seagoing condition. However, maximum permissible mass is in no case to be greater than the maximum permissible cargo mass at designed maximum load draught for each cargo hold.
Ch 4, App 1, [3.2.2]
The maximum permissible cargo mass and minimum required cargo mass corresponding to draught for loading/unloading conditions in harbour may be increased or decreased by 15% of the maximum permissible mass for the cargo hold. However, maximum permissible mass is in no case to be greater than the maximum permissible cargo mass at designed maximum load draught for each cargo hold.
The maximum permissible cargo mass and minimum required cargo mass corresponding to draught for loading/unloading conditions in harbour may be increased or decreased by 15% of the maximum permissible mass at the maximum draught for the cargo hold in
Editorial correction
case to be greater than the maximum permissible cargo mass at designed maximum load draught for each cargo hold.
Page 4/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Ch 5, Sec 1, [1.4.2] ..................
Explanation
Editorial correction (change Y in the formula into small letter)
if continuous trunks or hatch coamings are taken into account in the calculation of IY , as specified in [1.2.2]:
V D = ( z T N ) 0.9 + 0.2 YT B zD N
..................
..................
Ch 5, Sec 1, Fig 2
Correction of cross-reference
'
) )
( 0)
Ch 5, Sec 1, [5.1.3]
................
................
QP =
120 Y t + QC QWV k S
QP =
120 Y t + QC QWV k S
................
................
Ch 5, Sec 1, [5.3.3]
................
................
Q P ,F =
................
120 Y t + QC QWV , F k S
QP , F =
................
120 Y t + QC QWV , F k S
Ch 5, Sec 2, [1.1.1]
The requirements of this Section apply to ships equal to or greater than 150 m in length.
The requirements of this Section apply to ships equal to or greater than 150 m in length L.
Editorial correction
Page 5/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Ch5, App1, Symbols IY
Explanation
Correction of cross-reference
Editorial correction
1 1
>1
=1
for
>1
=1
for
Ch 6, Sec 1, Symbols
ca
ca
Editorial correction
Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.5.3]
...................... This increase in net thickness is to be equal to 40%, but need not
...................... This increase in net thickness is not to be less than 40% of the net
Editorial correction
......................
Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.6.2]
...................... This increase in net thickness is to be equal to 40%, but need not
...................... This increase in net thickness is not to be less than 40% of the net
Editorial correction
......................
Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.2]
.....................
.....................
F = KS
......................
Wn1n 2 , n3
F = KS
......................
Wn1n 2 n3
Page 6/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Ch 6, Sec 1, Figure 3
Dunnage
Explanation
Editorial and cross-reference correction
Inn. BTM
Floor
BTM
Inner bottom
Floor
Bottom
Ch 6, Sec 1, Figure 4
Dun n age
St eel coil
Dunnage
Steel coil
Editorial correction
In n . BTM
l'
F loor
BTM
Inner bottom
Floor
Bottom
Ch 6, Sec 1, [3.1.5]
Editorial correction
X = C C SW
where:
M SW M M ( z N ) + CWV WV ( z N ) CWH WH y 10 3 IY IY IZ
X = C SW
M SW M WV M ( z N ) + CWV ( z N ) CWH WH y 10 3 IY IY IZ
...
for
C =
x 0.3L
x < 0.3 L
Page 7/19
19 May 2006
Reference
C = 1 .0
C =
..
Explanation
0 .3
0 .7 <
1 x 1 0.3 L
for
Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.5.3]
Ash =
Ash =
where:
where:
: Angle, in deg, between inner bottom plating and hopper sloping plate or inner hull plating.
: Angle, in deg, between inner bottom plating and hopper sloping plate or inner hull plating
Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.1.5]
Editorial correction
X = C C SW
where:
M SW M M ( z N ) + CWV WV ( z N ) CWH WH y 10 3 IY IY IZ
X = C SW
M SW M WV M ( z N ) + CWV ( z N ) CWH WH y 10 3 IY IY IZ
...
for
C =
x 0.3L
x < 0.3 L
Page 8/19
19 May 2006
Reference
C = 1 .0
Explanation
0 .3
C =
..
1 x 1 0.3 L
for
0 .7 <
x 1 .0 L
Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.2.4]
3.2.4
3.2.4
Editorial correction
The net section modulus w, in cm , of corrugated bulkhead of ballast hold for ships having a length less than 150m subjected to lateral
The net section modulus w, in cm3, of corrugated bulkhead of ballast hold for ships having a length L less than 150m subjected to lateral
pressure are to be not less than the values obtained from the following formula: ........................
pressure are to be not less than the values obtained from the following formula: ........................
Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.3.3]
..
' t LB
..
1 3
' 2 t LB = t LB tW
t2 = LB tw
Editorial correction
3
e = 0 .9 E
.
t b
e = 0,9 E
b
t b'
Page 9/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Ch 6, Sec 3, Tab 2
Explanation
Add line in third column
8
sx
t ab
sx
===
2 3 2 < 3
K = 6.97
8
sx
t
K=
+ 2.5 + 5 2
sx
===
2 3
K = 6.97
ab
<
2 3
K=
+ 2.5 + 5 2
Ch 6, Sec 3, [3.1.2]
Each term of the above conditions must be less than 1.0. The reduction factors x and y are given in Tab 2 and/or Tab 3. The coefficients e1, e2 and e3 are defined in Tab 4.
Each term of the above conditions must be less than 1.0. The reduction factors x and y are given in Tab 2 and/or Tab 3 The coefficients e1, e2 and e3 are defined in Tab 4. For the
Information missing
ta
ta
1 = t ReH E
m1 a
2
m2 b
2
1 = t ReH E
m1 a
2
m2 b2
Ch 6, Sec 3, [4.2.3]
Longitudinal and transverse ordinary stiffeners not subjected to lateral pressure are considered as complying with the requirement of [4.2.1] if their gross moments of inertia Ix and Iy , in cm4, are not less than the
Longitudinal and transverse ordinary stiffeners not subjected to lateral pressure are considered as complying with the requirement of [4.2.1] if their net moments of inertia Ix and Iy , in cm4, are not less
Editorial correction
Page 10/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Ch 6, Sec 3, [6.1.1]
Explanation
Editorial corrections (1st line subscript E into Italic, and 2nd line: add subscript E) Editorial correction
ReH 2 3
2 3
c =
1.2
ReH 3
ReH 4 3 E
for E >
ReH 2 3
Ch 6, Sec 4, [1.2]
1.2
150 m in length
150 m in length L
Ch 6, Sec 4, [1.2.1]
For primary supporting members for ships having a length less than 150
m, the strength check of such members is to be carried out according to the provisions specified in [2] and [4].
than 150 m, the strength check of such members is to be carried out according to the provisions specified in [2] and [4].
Editorial correction
Ch 6, Sec 4, [1.3]
1.3
1.3
more in length
or more in length L
Editorial correction
Ch 6, Sec 4, [1.3.1]
more, the direct strength analysis is to be carried out according to the provisions specified in Ch 7. In addition, ............
m or more, the direct strength analysis is to be carried out according to the provisions specified in Ch 7. In addition, ............
Editorial correction
Ch 6, Sec 4, [2]
2.
Scantling of primary supporting members for ships of less than 150 m in length
2.
Scantling of primary supporting members for ships of less than 150 m in length L
Editorial correction
Ch 6, Sec 4, [2.1.5]
Editorial correction
X = C C SW
where:
M SW M M ( z N ) + CWV WV ( z N ) CWH WH y 10 3 IY IY IZ
X = C SW
M SW M WV M ( z N ) + CWV ( z N ) CWH WH y 10 3 IY IY IZ
...
for
C =
x 0.3L
x < 0.3 L
Page 11/19
19 May 2006
Reference
C = 1 .0
Explanation
0 .3
C =
..
1 x 1 0.3 L
for
0 .7 <
x 1 .0 L
Ch 6, Sec 4, [2.6.3]
..
..
t w = 1.75 3
where:
hw a Ash 10 C 5
t w = 1.75 3
where:
h w a 10 4 C 5
Editorial correction
Ash
Ch 6, Sec 4, [3.1.3]
Ag
Ag
Editorial correction
Ch 6, Sec 4, [3.1.4]
X =
X =
( perm 1) 1+ C
( perm 1) C
X = Z + g (z F 0,1D1 hF perm )
X = Z + g (z F 0.1D1 hF perm )
X =
X =
1 C
..
..
Page 12/19
19 May 2006
Reference
hf
Explanation
Ch 7, Sec 1, Fig 1
..........................
Fatigue Assessment (Sec 3 & Ch 8)
..........................
Fatigue Assessment (Sec 4 & Ch 8)
Ch 7, Sec 2, [2.5.4]
2.5.4
2.5.4
C=
E 2(1 )
2
E 2(1 2 )
E 4(1 2 )
Ch 7, App 2 [2.2.2]
LC 3: shear
LC 5: shear:
4 i =1
= 0.25
Editorial corrections
1 + 2 + 3 + 4
4
Page 13/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Ch7, App 2, [2.2.3] 2.2.3
Explanation
Text was not in the right place
Stress displacement relationship for a 8-node buckling panel (compressive stresses are positive) Figure 2: 8-node buckling panel
Editorial correction
Editorial corrections
Ch 7, App 2 [2.2.3]
LC 1: longitudinal compression
LC 1: longitudinal compression
Editorial correction
Page 14/19
19 May 2006
Reference
l = Max
l =
Explanation
1 ( 4 x 1x 5 x + 6 x + 3 x 2 x ) 3 x = l + 0.5 l
x = 1 l / x
Ch 7, App 2 [2.2.3]
x = 1 l / x
LC 5: shear
Editorial correction
LC 5: shear
=
m , j
1 6
6 i =1
i
m ,1
= Max
1 + 4 + 5 + 6 2 + 3 + 5 + 6
4 , 4
Ch 8, Sec 2, [2.3.2]
: Local hot spot mean stress, in N/mm2, in the condition j, obtained from the following formulae:
: Local hot spot mean stress, in N/mm2, in the condition 1, obtained from the following formulae: if 0.6 W , 1 2.5ReH :
ReH 0.6 W , 1
for res + mean, 1 + 0.6 W , 1 > ReH for res + mean, 1 + 0.6 W , 1 ReH for 0.6 W , 1 ReH
for m,1 mean, 1 + mean, j 0.24 W , j > ReH for m,1 mean, 1 + mean, j 0.24 W , j ReH for 0.6 W , j ReH
m, 1 = 0.18 W , 1
if 0.6 W , 1 < 2.5ReH :
Coefficient in the third condition corrected from 0.6 to 0.24 and rearrangement of the conditional statements
m, 1 = ReH 0.6 W , 1
0.6 W , 1 > ReH res mean , 1
for
m , 1 = mean ,1 + res
0.6 W , 1 ReH res mean , 1
for
m , j
: Local hot spot mean stress, in N/mm2, in the condition j, obtained from the following formulae: if 0.24 W , j ReH :
Page 15/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Explanation
m, j ( j 1) = ReH + 0.24 W , j
for
m, j ( j 1) = m ,1 mean , 1 + mean , j
for
Ch 8, Sec 3, [3.2.1]
Ch 9, Sec 1, Tab 2
Intact conditions
t = 15.8c a c r s
p S + pW 0.7 RY
Intact conditions
t = 15.8c a c r s
p S + pW 0.9 RY
t = 15.8c a c r s
p FB 0.7 RY
t = 15.8c a c r s
p FB 0.9 RY
Editorial correction in the formulae for intact conditions and bow flare area
Testing conditions
t = 15.8c a c r s
pT 1.05RY
Testing conditions
t = 15.8c a c r s
pT 1.05RY
Editorial correction (comma)
Ch 9, Sec 1, Tab 3
Ch 9, Sec 1, [5.2.1]
t = 15.8CaCr s
t = 15.8Ca Cr s
Page 16/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Ch 9, Sec 1, [5.3.1]
w= Cs PSL s 2 3 10 16 ReH
5 3 PSL s ( 0.5s ) ReH sin
Explanation
Editorial correction (small letter) Editorial correction (small letter) Correction of cross-reference and correction in order to comply with IACS UR S28 Rev.2 Sept. 2005
Ch 9, Sec 1, [5.3.2]
A=
A=
Ch 9, Sec 1, [7.1.1]
An enclosed forecastle is to be fitted on the freeboard deck. The aft bulkhead of the enclosed forecastle is to be fitted in way or aft of the forward bulkhead of the foremost hold, as shown in Fig 3.
An enclosed forecastle is to be fitted on the freeboard deck. The aft bulkhead of the enclosed forecastle is to be fitted in way or aft of the forward bulkhead of the foremost hold, as shown in Fig 2.
of the foremost cargo hold provided the forecastle length is not less
Ch 9, Sec 2, Tab 2
Net thickness, in mm
Net thickness, in mm
Intact conditions
t = 15.8c a c r s
p S + pW 0.7 RY
Intact conditions
t = 15.8c a c r s
p S + pW 0.9 RY
Testing conditions
t = 15.8c a c r s
pT 1.05RY
Testing conditions
t = 15.8c a c r s
pT 1.05RY
Editorial correction
Ch 9, Sec 5, [2.4.3]
Hold accesses located on the weather deck are to be provided with watertight metallic hatch covers, unless they are protected by a closed
Hold accesses located on the weather deck are to be provided with weathertight metallic hatch covers, unless they are protected by a
superstructure. The same applies to accesses located on the forecastle deck and leading directly to a dry cargo hold through a trunk.
closed superstructure. The same applies to accesses located on the forecastle deck and leading directly to a dry cargo hold through a trunk.
If applicable, the still water and wave lateral pressures are .........
Page 17/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Explanation
longitudinally, at the hatch cover mid-length transversely, on the longitudinal plane of symmetry of the ship vertically, at the top of the hatch coaming.
longitudinally, at the hatch cover mid-length transversely, on the longitudinal plane of symmetry of the ship vertically, at the top of the hatch cover.
Ch 9, Sec 5, [6.3.2]
w = 1.21
cSH :
p C sl 2 10 3 mc p ReH
Coefficient which accounts for the absence of sheer, if
w = 1.21
p C s 2103 mc p ReH
Ch 9, Sec 6, [5.4.2]
CSH :
applicable, to be taken equal to: cSH = 1.0 in the case of standard sheer or sheer greater than standard
applicable, to be taken equal to: CSH = 1.0 in the case of standard sheer or sheer greater than standard
................ Bulwarks are to be aligned with the beams located below or are to be
................ Stay and brackets of bulwarks are to be aligned with the beams
connected to them by means of local transverse stiffeners. As an alternative, the lower end of the stay may be supported by a longitudinal stiffener.
located below or are to be connected to them by means of local transverse stiffeners. As an alternative, the lower end of the stay and bracket may be
A windlass brake is to be provided having sufficient capacity to stop the anchor and chain cable when paying out the latter with safety, in the
A windlass brake is to be provided having sufficient capacity to stop the anchor and chain cable when paying out the latter with safety, in
Editorial correction
Page 18/19
19 May 2006
Reference
Explanation
Windlasses not actuated by steam are also to be provided with a non-return device.
For ships of length 80 m or more, where the height of the exposed deck
Where the height of the exposed deck in way of the item .....................
Editorial correction
(2) Leg length of fillet welds is made fine adjustments corresponding to the corrosion addition tC specified in Ch 3, Sec 3, Tab 1 as
(2) Leg length of fillet welds is made fine adjustments corresponding to the corrosion addition tC specified in Ch 3, Sec
Editorial correction
follows:
3, Tab 1 as follows:
tc
tC
. tvoluntary_addition : Voluntary thickness addition; Thickness, in mm, voluntarily added as the Owners extra margin for corrosion wastage in addition to tc
. tvoluntary_addition : Voluntary thickness addition; Thickness, in mm, voluntarily added as the Owners extra margin for corrosion wastage in addition to tC
Page 19/19
CORRIGENDA 2
Notes: (1) These Rule Corrigenda enter into force on 1 April 2006. (2) This document contains a copy of the affected rule along with the editorial change or clarification noted as applicable.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 1 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
7.
7.1 7.1.1
10.
10.4
Bulkhead structure
Corrugated bulkheads For ships of 190m of length L and above, the transverse vertically corrugated watertight bulkheads are to be fitted with a lower stool, and generally with an upper stool below the deck. For ships less than 190m in length L, In ships less than 150 m in length, corrugations may extend from the inner bottom to the deck provided the global strength of hull structures are satisfactorily proved for ships having ship length L of 150m and above by DSA as required by Ch 7 of the Rules.
10.4.1 General
Reason for the Rule Clarification: The correction is made to be in line with IACS UR S18.
PAGE 2 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
10.4.8 Upper stool The upper stool, when fitted, is to have a height in general between two and three times the depth of corrugations. Rectangular stools are to have a height in general equal to twice the depth of corrugations, measured from the deck level and at the hatch side girder. The upper stool of transverse bulkhead is to be properly supported by deck girders or deep brackets between the adjacent hatch end beams. The width of the upper stool bottom plate is generally to be the same as that of the lower stool top plate. The stool bottom top of non-rectangular stools is to have a width not less than twice the depth of corrugations. The thickness and material of the stool bottom plate are to be the same as those of the bulkhead plating below. The thickness of the lower portion of stool side plating is to be not less than 80% of that required for the upper part of the bulkhead plating where the same material is used. The ends of stool side ordinary stiffeners when fitted in a vertical plane, are to be attached to brackets at the upper and lower end of the stool. The stool is to be fitted with diaphragms in line with and effectively attached to longitudinal deck girders extending to the hatch end coaming girders or transverse deck primary supporting members as the case may be, for effective support of the corrugated bulkhead. Scallops in the brackets and diaphragms in way of the connection to the stool bottom plate are to be avoided. Reason for the Rule Clarification: Editorial correction
PAGE 3 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
1.
1.1 1.1.1
General
Sign conversions of bending moments and shear forces Absolute values are to be taken for bending moments and shear forces introduced in this Section. The sign of bending moments and shear forces is to be considered according to Sec 4, Tab 3. The sign conventions of vertical bending moments, horizontal bending moments and shear forces at any ship transverse section are as shown in Fig 1, namely: the vertical bending moments MSW and MWV are positive when they induce tensile stresses in the strength deck (hogging bending moment) and are negative in the opposite case (sagging bending moment) the horizontal bending moment MWH is positive when it induces tensile stresses in the starboard and is negative in the opposite case. the vertical shear forces Q QSW, QWV is are positive in the case of downward resulting forces preceding and upward resulting forces following the ship transverse section under consideration, and is negative in the opposite case.
( +)
Fore
( +)
Fore
( +)
( +)
Fore
( +)
Figure 1:
( +)
Sign conventions for shear forces Q QSW, QWV and bending moments MSW, MWV and MWH
PAGE 4 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
2.
2.2 2.2.2
QC
Full hold
QC
Full hold
Figure 2 :
Reason for the Rule Clarification: Editorial correction correction of equation in Figure 2
PAGE 5 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
4.
4.4 4.4.1
where ZR,MIN is the required net midship section modulus ZR,MIN, in m3, calculated as specified in [4.2.1] or [4.2.2], but assuming k = 1.
PAGE 6 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
2.
2.2 2.2.4
CR1 = C1
where:
AStif : Net sectional area of the stiffener, in cm2, without attached plating
C1 = R eH 1
R eH 2
: Net moment of inertia of ordinary stiffeners, in cm4, with attached shell plating of width bE1
b E1 =
E R eH
E
b E1 = s
for E 1.0
E = 10 3
s tp
AE : Net sectional area, in cm2, of ordinary stiffeners with attached shell plating of width bE bE
: Effective width, in m, of the attached shell plating, equal to:
2.25 1.25 bE = 2 s E E
PAGE 7 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
bE = s
for E 1.25
Figure 3
2.2.5
Torsional Buckling
The equation describing the load-end shortening curve CR2- for the flexural-torsional buckling of ordinary stiffeners composing the hull girder transverse section is to be obtained according to the following formula (see Fig 4).
CR 2 =
where:
AStif : Net sectional area of the stiffener, in cm2, without attached plating
R eH 2 R eH 2
C 2 = R eH 1
PAGE 8 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
Figure 4
2.2.7
The equation describing the load-end shortening curve CR4- for the web local buckling of flat bar ordinary stiffeners composing the hull girder transverse section is to be obtained from the following formula (see Fig 5):
CR 4 =
where:
10st P CP + AStif C 4
AStif + 10st P
AStif : Net sectional area of the stiffener, in cm2, without attached plating
CP : Buckling stress of the attached plating, in N/mm2, defined in [2.2.5] C4 : Critical stress, in N/mm2, equal to: C4 = E4
R eH 4 E4
for E 4 for E 4 >
R eH 2 R eH 2
C 4 = R eH 1
PAGE 9 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
Figure 5
PAGE 10 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
2.
2.5 2.5.1
General requirements
Sheerstrake Welded sheerstrake
The net thickness of a welded sheerstrake is to be not less than the actual net thicknesses of the adjacent 2 m width side plating, taking into account higher strength steel corrections if needed.
Reason for the Rule Clarification:
Editorial correction
3.
3.3 3.3.2
Yielding check
Strength criteria for single span ordinary stiffeners other than side frames of single side bulk carriers Supplementary strength requirements
In addition to [3.3.1], the net moment of inertia, in cm4, of the 3 side frames located immediately abaft the collision bulkhead is to be not less than the value obtained from the following formula:
= 0.18
where:
(pS + p W )l 4
n
Side frame span, in m Number of frames from the bulkhead to the frame in question, taken equal to 1, 2 or 3 Frame spacing, in m
n s
: : :
As an alternative, supporting structures, such as horizontal stringers, are to be fitted between the collision bulkhead and a side frame which is in line with transverse webs fitted in both the topside tank and hopper tank, maintaining the continuity of forepeak stringers within the foremost hold.
CORRIGENDA 2
3.4 3.4.2
Upper and lower connections of side frames of single side bulk carriers
The net connection area, Ai, in cm2, of the bracket to the i-th longitudinal stiffener supporting the bracket is to be obtained from the following formula:
Ai = 0.4 where: wi :
w i s k bkt 2 l 1 k lg ,i Net section modulus, in cm3, of the i-th longitudinal stiffener of the side or sloped bulkheads that support the lower or the upper end connecting bracket of the side frame, as applicable As defined in [3.4.1] Material factor for the bracket Material factor for the i-th longitudinal stiffener
Frame spacing, in m
1 kbkt klg,i
s
: : :
:
PAGE 12 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
4.
4.1 4.1.3
The stress at ends of web stiffeners of primary supporting members in water ballast tanks, in N/mm2, is to comply with the following formula when no bracket is fitted: .
bs b' b'
Standard shapes of the end of the stiffener
bs
bs
b'
Shape of the end of the stiffener considering fatigue strength in comparison with the standard shape
bs
bs
bs
b'
b'
Standard shapes of the end of the stiffener
b'
Shape of the end of the stiffener considering fatigue strength in comparison with the standard shape
Editorial correction correction of the indication of the smallest breadth (b') shown in the lefthand figure
PAGE 13 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
SECTION 3 BUCKLING & ULTIMATE STRENGTH OF ORDINARY STIFFENERS AND STIFFENED PANELS
1.
1.1 1.1.2
General
The buckling checks have to be performed for the following elements: a) according to requirements of [2], [3] and [4] and for all load cases as defined in Ch 4, Sec 4 in intact condition:
Elementary plate panels and ordinary stiffeners in a hull transverse section analysis, Elementary plate panels modeled in FEM as requested in Ch 7. transverse vertically corrugated watertight bulkheads for BC-A and BC-B ships.
4.
4.2 4.2.2
b =
with: M0
M 0 + M1 Wst 10 3
: Bending moment, in N.mm, due to the deformation w of stiffener, taken equal to:
M 0 = FKi pz w c f pz
with c f p z > 0
M1
: Bending moment, in N.mm, due to the lateral load p, taken equal to:
M1 = pba 2 24 10 3
PAGE 14 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
pa(n b )2 for transverse stiffeners, with n equal to 1 for ordinary 8c S 10 3 transverse stiffeners. M1 = Wst
: Net section modulus of stiffener (longitudinal or transverse), in cm3, including effective width of plating according to 5, taken equal to:
cS
p FKi
: Lateral load in kN/m2 , as defined in Ch 4, Sec5 and Ch 4, Sec 6 calculated at the load point as defined in Ch 6, Sec 2, [1.4.21.4] : Ideal buckling force, in N, of the stiffener, taken equal to:
FKix = FKiy =
2
a2
EI x 10 4
(nb )2
Ix , Iy
: Net moments of inertia, in cm4, of the longitudinal or transverse stiffener including effective width of attached plating according to 5. Ix and Iy are to comply with the following criteria: Ix Iy bt 3 12 10 4 at 3 12 10 4
pz
p zy =
xl = x 1 +
Ax bt a
ta
PAGE 15 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
cx , cy
: Factor taking into account the stresses vertical to the stiffener's axis and distributed variable along the stiffener's length taken equal to:
0 1
<0
1 = t R eH E
m1 m 2 + 2 0 2 b a
w 0 = min(
w 0 = min(
For stiffeners sniped at both ends w0 must not be taken less than the distance from the midpoint of attached plating to the neutral axis of the stiffener calculated with the effective width of its attached plating. w1 : Deformation of stiffener, in mm, at midpoint of stiffener span due to lateral load p. In case of uniformly distributed load the following values for w1 may be used: w1 = w1 =
cf
: Elastic support provided by the stiffener, in N/mm2, taken equal to: for longitudinal stiffeners c f = FKix
2 (1 + c px ) a2
PAGE 16 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
c px =
c xa
for
2
a 2b
c xa
a 2 = 1 + 2b
for
a < 2b
c f = c S FKiy
c py =
(n b )2
1
(1 + c )
py
c ya
for
2
nb 2 a
c ya
nb 2 = 1 + 2a
for
nb < 2 a
4.2.3
Equivalent criteria for longitudinal and transverse ordinary stiffeners not subjected to lateral pressure
Longitudinal and transverse ordinary stiffeners not subjected to lateral pressure are considered as complying with the requirement of [4.2.1] if their net moments of inertia Ix and Iy , in cm4, are not less than the value obtained by the following formula:
p zx a 2 w0 h w a2 + 2 Ix = 2 4 10 R eH E x S
PAGE 17 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
p zy (nb ) 2 w 0 h w (nb ) 2 + 2 Iy = 2 10 4 R eH E y S
4.3 4.3.1
The longitudinal ordinary stiffeners are to comply with the following criteria:
xS 1.0 T R eH T
: Coefficient taken equal to:
T = KiT =
IP IT I
KiT
E IP 2 I 10 2 + 0.385I T a2
, in N/mm2
R eH
: Net polar moment of inertia of the stiffener, in cm4, defined in Tab 5, and related to the point C as shown in Fig 2 : Net St. Venant's moment of inertia of the stiffener, in cm4, defined in Tab 5, : Net sectorial moment of inertia of the stiffener, in cm6, defined in Tab 5, related to the point C as shown in Fig 2 : Degree of fixation taken equal to:
= 1 + 10 3
a4 3 4 b I w 3 + 4h w 3 3t w 4 t
Aw Af
: Net web area equal to: Aw = h w t w : Net flange area equal to: A f = b f t f
PAGE 18 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
e f = hw +
tf
, in mm
bf tw tw bf tw
b1
bf tw b1 b2 C
hw
ef
ef = h w + t f / 2
Figure 2: Table 5:
Profile Flat bar IP
3 hwt w 3 10 4
ta
tf
Iw
t 1 0.63 w hw t 1 0.63 w hw
+
3 3 hwt w 36 10 6
2 Aw h w 2 4 3 + A f e f 10
A f e 2 b 2 A f + 2.6 A w f f 12 10 6 A f + Aw
for tee-sections
b f t3 t f 1 0.63 f 4 bf 3 10
b3 t f e2 f f
12 10 6
6.
Transverse vertical corrugated watertight bulkhead in flooded conditions for BC-A and BC-B ships
Editorial correction
PAGE 19 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
3.
3.1 3.1.4
Additional requirements for primary supporting members of BC-A and BC-B ships
Evaluation of double bottom capacity and allowable hold loading in flooded conditions Allowable hold loading
1 F
where:
F
: Coefficient to be taken equal to: F = 1.1 in general F = 1.05 for steel mill products : Volume, in m3, occupied by cargo at a level hB : Level of cargo, in m2, to be obtained from the following formula: X hB = C g : Pressure, in kN/m2, to be obtained from the following formulae:
V hB
for dry bulk cargoes, the lesser of: Z + g (zF 0.1D1 hF ) X= 1+ (perm 1)
D1 hf
: Distance, in m, from the base line to the freeboard deck at side amidships : Inner bottom flooding head is the distance, in m, measured vertically with the ship in the upright position, from the inner bottom to a level located at a distance zF, in m, from the baseline. : Flooding level, in m, defined in Ch 4, Sec 6, [3.3.3 3.4.3] : Permeability of cargo, which need not be taken greater than 0.3 : Pressure, in kN/m2, to be taken as the lesser of: CH Z= ADB ,H CE Z= ADB ,E
zF perm Z
PAGE 20 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
CH
: Shear capacity of the double bottom, in kN, to be calculated according to [3.1.1], considering, for each floor, the lesser of the shear strengths Sf1 and Sf2 (see [3.1.2]) and, for each girder, the lesser of the shear strengths Sg1 and Sg2 (see [3.1.3]) : Shear capacity of the double bottom, in kN, to be calculated according to [3.1.1], considering, for each floor, the shear strength Sf1 (see [3.1.2]) and, for each girder, the lesser of the shear strengths Sg1 and Sg2 (see [3.1.3])
CE
ADB ,H = ADB ,E =
S B
i =1 n i i =1 i
DB ,i
S (B
DB
s)
n Si BDB,i
: Number of floors between stools (or transverse bulkheads, if no stool is fitted) : Space of i-th floor, in m : Length, in m, to be taken equal to : BDB,i = BDB - s for floors for which Sf1 < Sf2 (see [3.1.2]) BDB,i = BDB,h for floors for which S f 1 S f 2 (see [3.1.2]) : Breadth, in m, of double bottom between the hopper tanks (see Fig 3) : Distance, in m, between the two openings considered (see Fig 3) : Spacing, in m, of inner bottom longitudinal ordinary stiffeners adjacent to the hopper tanks.
BDB BDB,h s
PAGE 21 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
2. 2.5
R H _ fore =
(x
i
r r x aft ) f i y R H _ aft = r r fi z r r i y
x fore x aft
f
i
r r i y + R H _ fore
QV _ FEM ( x ) = RV _ aft
i i
Q H _ FEM ( x ) = R H _ aft +
i i
r r (x xi ) f i z
i
(x x ) f
r r i y
: Location of the aft end support : Location of the fore end support : Considered location and aft ends
RV _ aft , RV _ fore , R H _ aft and R H _ fore : Vertical and horizontal reaction forces at the fore
QV _ FEM , Q H _ FEM , MV _ FEM and M H _ FEM : Vertical and horizontal shear forces and
r fi
bending moments created by the local loads applied on the FE model. Sign of QV_FEM, MV_FEM and MH_FEM is in accordance with the sign convention defined in Ch 4, Sec 3. The sign convention for reaction forces is that a positive creates a positive shear force. : Applied force on node i due to all local loads
PAGE 22 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
xi
[Q
V _ T ( x eq ) QV _ FEM ( x eq )
( x fore x aft )
2
[Q
H _ T ( x eq ) Q H _ FEM ( x eq )
In order to control the bending moments at the target locations, another two sets of enforced moments are applied at both ends of the model. These moments are calculated by following formulae:
x eq x aft 1 MY _ aft _ BM = MY _ fore _ BM = MV _ T ( x eq ) MV _ FEM ( x eq ) MY _ aft _ SF 2 x fore x aft
x eq x aft 1 M Z _ aft _ BM = M Z _ fore _ BM = M H _ T ( x eq ) M H _ FEM ( x eq ) M Z _ aft _ SF 2 x fore x aft where: x eq : Considered location for the hull girder loads evaluation,
QV _ FEM , Q H _ FEM , MV _ FEM , M H _ FEM : As defined in [2.5.4] QV _ T , Q H _ T , MV _ T , M H _ T : Target vertical and horizontal shear forces and bending moments, defined in Tab 3 or Tab 4, at the location x eq . Sign of QV_T, MV_T
and MH_T is in accordance with sign convention defined in Ch 4, Sec 3.
CORRIGENDA 2
MZ_fore_SF, MZ_aft_BM and MZ_fore_BM is that of the FE model axis. The sign convention for other bending moment, shear forces and reaction forces is in accordance with the sign convention defined in Ch 4, Sec 3.
The enforced moments at the model ends can be generated by one of the following methods: to apply distributed forces at the end section of the model, with a resulting force equal to zero and a resulting moment equal to the enforced moment. The distributed forces are applied to the nodes on the longitudinal members where boundary conditions are given according to Tab 1. The distributed forces are to be determined by using the thin wall beam theory to apply concentrated moments at the independent points defined in [2.3.1].
PAGE 24 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
3. 3.2
3.2.1
x F( x ) = 1 exp W , j x F( x ) = 1 exp E , j
where: :
(ln N R ) 1 (ln N R )
Weibull shape parameter, taken equal to 1.0 Number of cycles, taken equal to 104.
NR :
Reason for the Rule Clarification: Editorial correction - correction of error in formula
PAGE 25 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
3. 3.3
3.3.2
Hot spot mean stress Mean stress according to the superimposition method
The hot spot stress due to still water bending moment, in N/mm2, in loading condition (k) is to be obtained with the following formula:
GS , ( k ) = K gh
where: MS , (k) :
M S , ( k ) (z N ) IY
10 3
PAGE 26 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
1. 1.4
Calculation formulae Computation of cross sectional properties for the entire cross section
Asymmetric cross section: Symmetric cross section (only half of the section is modeled)
A ys zs Iy Iz
= =
= = =
A S A S A I Az I Ay
z y y z
zs Iy Iz
= = =
2 s 2 s
S A 2( I A z ) 2( I A y ) 2( I A y )
y y
2 s
2 s
I yz
= =
yz
Ay
zs
IT
st3 3
IT
st3 + 2 A yi i 3 Cell i
0
I y
I z
= = = =
S A I A y I A z
y z s s
I y
yM zM I
I z I z I y I yz
2 I y I z I yz
= =
I z I yz I y I y
2 I y I z I yz
zM
2 0
= =
I y Iz
m
I A
+ z m I y y M I z
I + z
I y
PAGE 27 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
3.
3.2 3.2.2
Load model
Pressure in bow area Lateral pressure in testing conditions
The lateral pressure pT in testing conditions is defined in Ch 4, Sec 6, [4] taken equal to:
pST pS pT = pST pS pT = pST for bottom shell plating and side shell plating otherwise
where: : Testing pressure defined in Ch 4, Sec 6, [4] : Pressure taken equal to:
if the testing is carried out afloat: hydrostatic pressure defined in Ch 4, Sec 5, [1] for the draught T1, defined by the Designer, at which the testing is carried out. If T1 is not defined, the testing is considered as being not carried out afloat. if the testing is not carried out afloat: pS = 0 Reason for the Rule Clarification:
Editorial correction this correction is made to be consistent with Ch 6, Sec 1, [3.1.4] and Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.1.4]
PAGE 28 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
2.
2.2 2.2.2
Load model
Lateral pressures Lateral pressure in testing conditions
The lateral pressure pT in testing conditions is defined in Ch 4, Sec 6, [4] taken equal to:
pST pS pT = pST pS pT = pST for bottom shell plating and side shell plating otherwise
where: : Testing pressure defined in Ch 4, Sec 6, [4] : Pressure taken equal to:
if the testing is carried out afloat: hydrostatic pressure defined in Ch 4, Sec 5, [1] for the draught T1, defined by the Designer, at which the testing is carried out. If T1 is not defined, the testing is considered as being not carried out afloat. if the testing is not carried out afloat: pS = 0 Reason for the Rule Clarification:
Editorial correction this correction is made to be consistent with Ch 6, Sec 1, [3.1.4] and Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.1.4]
PAGE 29 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
7.
7.2 7.2.1
The net scantlings of the structural elements in way of the internal combustion engine seatings are to be obtained from the formulae in Tab 2. Table 1: Minimum scantlings of the structural elements in way of machinery seatings
Scantling minimum value
cm2,
of each bedplate of
40 + 70
P nr LE
Total web net thickness, in mm, of girders fitted in way of machinery seatings
P nr LE
55 + 40
PAGE 30 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
4.
4.1 4.1.2
Load model
Lateral pressures and forces Sea pressure
The still water and wave lateral pressures are to be considered and are to be taken equal to:
5.
5.2 5.2.2
Strength check
Plating Minimum net thickness
In addition to [5.2.1], the net thickness, in mm, of the plating forming the top of the hatch cover is to be not less than the greater of the following values:
t = 0.01s
t = 10s t=6 Reason for the Rule Clarification:
PAGE 31 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 2
4.
4.5 4.5.1
Rudder couplings
Cone couplings with special arrangements for mounting and dismounting the couplings
Where the stock diameter exceeds 200 mm, the press fit is recommended to be effected by a hydraulic pressure connection. In such cases the cone is to be more slender, c 1 : 2 c 1 : 12 to 1 : 20 .
Reason for the Rule Clarification:
PAGE 32 OF 32
CORRIGENDA 3
Notes: (1) These Rule Corrigenda enter into force on 1 April 2006 (2) This document contains a copy of the affected rule along with the editorial change or clarification noted as applicable.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 1 OF 2
CORRIGENDA 3
CHAPTER 6
SECTION 3 BUCKLING & ULTIMATE STRENGTH OF ORDINARY STIFFENERS AND STIFFENED PANELS
Symbols
e
e = 0.9 E
t b
b'
***
PAGE 2 OF 2
CORRIGENDA 4
Notes: (1) These Rule Corrigenda enter into force on 1 April 2006 (2) This document contains a copy of the affected rule along with the editorial change or clarification noted as applicable.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 1 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
2.
2.1 2.1.2
Collision bulkhead
Arrangement of collision bulkhead
Ref. SOLAS Ch. II-1, Part B, Reg. 11 Where any part of the ship below the waterline extends forward of the forward perpendicular, e.g. a bulbous bow, the distances, in metres, stipulated in [2.1.1] are to be measured from a point either: at the mid-length of such extension, or at a distance 1.5 per cent of the length LLL of the ship forward of the forward perpendicular, or at a distance 3 metres forward of the forward perpendicular, , whichever gives the smallest measurement.
PAGE 2 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
2.
2.3
PAGE 3 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
Table 4 Application of material classes and grades Structural member category Material class Within 0.4L Outside 0.4L amidship amidship
SECONDARY Longitudinal bulkhead strakes, other than that belonging to the Primary category I A/AH Deck Plating exposed to weather, other than that belonging to the Primary or Special category Side plating (7) PRIMARY Bottom plating, including keel plate Strength deck plating, excluding that belonging to the Special category Continuous longitudinal members above strength deck, II A/AH excluding hatch coamings Uppermost strake in longitudinal bulkhead Vertical strake (hatch side girder) and uppermost sloped strake in top wing tank SPECIAL Sheer strake at strength deck (1), (6) Stringer plate in strength deck (1), (6) Deck strake at longitudinal bulkhead (6) Strength deck plating at corners of cargo hatch openings in bulk carriers, ore carriers, combination carriers and other II ships with similar hatch openings configuration (2) III (I outside 0.6L Bilge strake (3), (4), (6) amidships) Longitudinal hatch coamings of length greater than 0.15L (5) Lower bracket of side frame of single side bulk carriers having additional service feature BC-A or BC-B (5) End brackets and deck house transition of longitudinal cargo hatch coamings (5) Notes: (1) Not to be less than grade E/EH within 0.4L amidships in ships with length exceeding 250 m. (2) Not to be less than class III within 0.6L amidships and class II within the remaining length of the cargo region. (3) May be of class II in ships with a double bottom over the full breadth and with length less than 150 m. (4) Not to be less than grade D/DH within 0.4L amidships in ships with length exceeding 250 m. (5) Not to be less than grade D/DH. (6) Single strakes required to be of class III or of grade E/EH and within 0.4L amidships are to have breadths, in m, not less than 0.8 + 0.05L 0.8 + 0.005L, need not be greater than 1.8 m, unless limited by the geometry of the ship's design. (7) For BC-A and BC-B ships with single side skin structures, side shell strakes included totally or partially between the two points located to 0.125l above and below the intersection of side shell and bilge hopper sloping plate are not to be less than grade D/DH, l being the frame span.
2.3.5
PAGE 4 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
The steel grade is to correspond to the as-built gross thickness when this is greater than the gross thickness obtained from the net thickness required by the Rules.
2.3.6
Steel grades of plates or sections of as-builtgross thickness greater than the limiting thicknesses in Tab 3 are considered by the Society on a case by case basis.
2.3.11
In highly stresses area, the Society may require that plates of gross thickness greater than 20mm are of grade D/DH or E/EH. Table 6 Material grade requirements for class I at low temperature -20 / -25 C -26 / -35 C -36 / -45 C -45 / -55 C As-built Tthickness NSS HSS NSS HSS NSS HSS NSS HSS (mm) t 10 A AH B AH D DH D DH 10 < t 15 B AH D DH D DH D DH 15 < t 20 B AH D DH D DH E EH 20 < t 25 D DH D DH D DH E EH 25 < t 30 D DH D DH E EH E EH 30 < t 35 D DH D DH E EH E EH 35 < t 45 D DH E EH E EH FH 45 < t 50 E EH E EH FH FH Note: NSS and HSS mean, respectively Normal Strength Steel and Higher Strength Steel Table 7 Material grade requirements for class II at low temperature -20 / -25 C -26 / -35 C -36 / -45 C -45 / -55 C As-built Thickness NSS HSS NSS HSS NSS HSS NSS HSS (mm) t 10 B AH D DH D DH E EH 10 < t 20 D DH D DH E EH E EH 20 < t 30 D DH E EH E EH FH 30 < t 40 E EH E EH FH FH 40 < t 45 E EH FH FH 45 < t 50 E EH FH FH Note: NSS and HSS mean, respectively Normal Strength Steel and Higher Strength Steel Table 8 Material grade requirements for class III at low temperature -20 / -25 C -26 / -35 C -36 / -45 C -45 / -55 C As-built Tthickness NSS HSS NSS HSS NSS HSS NSS HSS (mm) t 10 D DH D DH E EH E EH 10 < t 20 D DH E EH E EH FH 20 < t 25 E EH E EH FH FH 25 < t 30 E EH E EH FH FH 30 < t 40 E EH FH FH 40 < t 45 E EH FH FH 45 < t 50 FH FH Note: NSS and HSS mean, respectively Normal Strength Steel and Higher Strength Steel
PAGE 5 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
PAGE 6 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
3.
3.1 3.1.4
The net transverse section scantling is to be obtained by deducting tC from the gross thickness offered of the elements which constitute the stiffener profile as shown in Fig.1. For bulb profiles, an equivalent angle profile, as specified in Ch 3, Sec 6 [4.1.1], may be considered. The net strength characteristics are to be calculated for the net transverse section. In assessing the net strength characteristics of stiffeners reflecting the hull girder stress and stress due to local bending of the local structure such as double bottom structure, the section modulus of hull girder or rigidity of structure is obtained by deducting 0.5tC from the gross thickness offered of the related elements.
bf
tf
hw tw
tp
bp
Shadow area is corrosion addition. For attached plate, the half of the considered corrosion addition specified in 3.2 is deducted from both sides of the attached plate. Fig. 1 Net scantling of stiffener
PAGE 7 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
2.
2.4 2.4.3
Strength criteria
Accidental limit state Bulkhead structure
Bulkhead structure in cargo hold flooded condition is to be assessed in accordance with Ch. 6 Sec4 Sec 1, Sec 2 and Sec 3.
PAGE 8 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
1.
1.1 1.1.2
Void double side skin spaces in cargo length area for vessels having a length (LLL) of not less than 150 m are to be coated in accordance with [1.2].
1.2 1.2.1
All dedicated seawater ballast tanks anywhere on the ship ( excluding ballast hold) for vessels having a length (L) of not less than 90m and void double side skin spaces in the cargo length area for vessels having a length (LLL) of not less than 150m are to have an efficient corrosion prevention system, such as hard protective coatings or equivalent, applied in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation. The coatings are to be of a light colour, i.e. a colour easily distinguishable from rust which facilitates inspection. Where appropriate, sacrificial anodes, fitted in accordance with [2], may also be used.
PAGE 9 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
General principles
Structural continuity
2.2.5 Platings
A change in plating thickness in as-built is not to exceed 50% of thicker plate thickness for load carrying direction. The butt weld preparation is to be in accordance with the requirements of Ch 11, Sec 2, [2.2].
10.
10.4
Bulkhead structure
Corrugated bulkhead
10.4.2 Construction
The main dimensions a, R, c, d, t, and sC of corrugated bulkheads are defined in Fig 28. The bending radius is not to be less than the following values, in mm:
R = 3.0t
where : t : As-built Net thickness, in mm, of the corrugated plate. The corrugation angle shown in Fig 28 is to be not less than 55. The thickness of the lower part of corrugations is to be maintained for a distance from the inner bottom (if no lower stool is fitted) or the top of the lower stool not less than 0.15lC. The thickness of the middle part of corrugations is to be maintained for a distance from the deck (if no upper stool is fitted) or the bottom of the upper stool not greater than 0.3lC. The section modulus of the corrugations in the remaining upper part of the bulkhead is to be not less than 75% of that required for the middle part, corrected for different minimum yield stresses. When welds in a direction parallel to the bend axis are provided in the zone of the bend, the welding procedures are to be submitted to the Society for approval.
a tf R c tw d
55 o
sC
PAGE 10 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
PAGE 11 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
3. 3.4
3.4.1
External pressures on superstructures and deckhouses Superstructure end bulkheads and deckhouse walls
Table 9:
L
90 < L 250
L > 250
th
50
25
(1) For the 4 tier and above, p A min is to be taken equal to 2.5 kN/m2.
PAGE 12 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
1. 1.3
1.3.1
Lateral pressure due to dry bulk cargo Inertial pressure due to dry bulk cargo
The inertial pressure induced by dry bulk cargo pCW, in kN/m2, for each load case is given by the following formulae. for load case H: for load case F: for load cases R and P:
p CW = C [ 0.25a X (x x G ) + K C a Z (hC + h DB z )] pCW = 0 p CW = C [ 0.25aY ( y y G ) + K C a Z (hC + h DB z )]
(x-xG) is to be taken as 0.25lH in the load case H1 or -0.25lH in the load case H2 for local strength by Ch 6 and fatigue check for longitudinal stiffeners by Ch 8. The total pressure (pCS + pCW ) is not to be negative.
2. 2.2
2.2.1
The inertial pressure due to liquid pBW, in kN/m2, for each load case is given as follows. When checking ballast water exchange operations by means of the flow through method, the inertial pressure due to ballast water is not to be considered for local strength assessments and direct strength analysis. for load case H: pBW = L [aZ (zTOP z) + aX (x xB)]
(x-xB) is to be taken as 0.75lH in the load case H1 or -0.75lH in the load case H2 for local strength by Ch 6 and fatigue check for longitudinal stiffeners by Ch 8 where: xB yB zB : X co-ordinate, in m, of the aft end of the tank when the bow side is downward, or of the fore end of the tank when the bow side is upward, as defined in Fig 3 : Y co-ordinate, in m, of the tank top located at the most lee side when the weather side is downward, or of the most weather side when the weather side is upward, as defined in Fig 3 : Z co-ordinate of the following point: for completely filled spaces: the tank top for ballast hold: the top of the hatch coaming The reference point B is defined as the upper most point after rotation by the angle between the vertical axis r and the global acceleration vector AG shown in Fig 3. is obtained from the following formulae: load cases H1 and H2: for load case F: for load cases R and P: pBW = 0 pBW = L [aZ (zB z)+ aY (yyB)]
PAGE 13 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
= tan 1 (
| aX | ) g cos + a Z
= tan 1 (
where:
: Single roll amplitude, in deg, defined in Ch4, Sec 2, 2.1.1. : Single pitch amplitude, in deg, defined in Ch4, Sec 2, 2.2.1
PAGE 14 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
2. 2.2
2.2.1
t = 28( s + 0.7)
( BT ) 0.25 ReH
t = 28( s + 0.7)
PAGE 15 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
4. 4.1
4.1.3
Where the web stiffeners of primary supporting members are welded to ordinary stiffener face plates, Tthe stress at ends of web stiffeners of primary supporting members in water ballast tanks, in N/mm2, is to comply with the following formula when no bracket is fitted:
175
where:
cos
for stiffeners in the double bottom or double side space (see Fig 8) for other cases (e.g. hopper tank, top side tank, etc.) (see Fig 8)
K longi : Coefficient considering shape of cross section of the longitudinal, taken equal to:
for symmetrical profile of stiffener (e.g. T-section, flat bar) for asymmetrical profile of stiffener (e.g. angle section, bulb profile)
: Coefficient considering the shape of the end of the stiffener, taken equal to:
K stiff = 1.0
K stiff = 0.8
for standard shape of the end of the stiffener (see Fig 9) for the improved shape of the end of the stiffener (see Fig 9)
: As given in Fig 10 : Stress range, in N/mm2, transferred from longitudinals into the end of web stiffener, as obtained from the following formula:
= 0.322h' [( Aw1 2W l 1 ) + ( Aw 2 l 2 )] + As 0
: Maximum inertial pressure due to liquid according to Ch 4 Sec 6 [2.2.1], in kN/m2, of the probability level of 10-4.,calculated at mid-span of the ordinary stiffener
h'
CORRIGENDA 4
hs h0 '
b'
: Smallest breadth at the end of the web stiffener, in mm, as shown in Fig 910
Note: ts: net thickness of the web stiffener, in mm. tw: net thickness of the collar plate, in mm.
PAGE 17 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
SECTION 3 BUCKLING & ULTIMATE STRENGTH OF ORDINARY STIFFENERS AND STIFFENED PANELS
S 3 + ReH
e3
1,0
e3
x S R x eH
e1 S 3 + ReH
y S y ReH
S 3 + ReH
e3
1,0
x S y ReH
e3 + S 3 1,0 ReH
e2
S y R y eH
e2
PAGE 18 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
APPENDIX 1
1. 1.3
1.3.4
The transverse elementary plate panel (face plate) is to be assessed using the normal stress parallel to the corrugation. The slanted elementary plate panel (web plate) is to be assessed using the combination of normal and shear stresses. The plate panel breadth b is to be measured according to Fig 8.
a)
Face plate assessment F1 = 1.1 is to be used The buckling load case 1, according to Ch 6, Sec 3, Tab 2, is to be used The size of the buckling field to be considered is b times b ( = 1 )
= 1. 0
The maximum vertical stress in the elementary plate panel is to be considered in applying the criteria The plate thickness t to be considered is the one at the location where the maximum vertical stress occurs
b) Web plate assessment F1 = 1.1 is to be used The buckling load cases 1 and 5, according to Ch 6, Sec 3, Tab 2, are to be used. The size of the buckling field to be considered is 2b times b ( = 2 )
= 1.0
The following two stress combinations are to be considered: The maximum vertical stress in the elementary plate panel plus the shear stress and longitudinal stress at the location where maximum vertical stress occurs The maximum shear stress in the elementary plate panel plus the vertical stress and longitudinal stress at the location where maximum shear stress occurs
The plate thickness t to be considered is the one at the location where the maximum vertical/shear stress occurs.
PAGE 19 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
3. 3.2
3.2.1
The hot spot stress in a very fine mesh is to be obtained using a linear extrapolation. The surface stresses located at 0.5 times and 1.5 times the net plate thickness are to be linearly extrapolated at the hot spot location, as described in Fig 3 and Fig.4. The principal stress at the hot spot location having an angle with the assumed fatigue crack greater than 45 is to be considered as the hot spot stress.
PAGE 20 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
APPENDIX 2
2. 2.2
2.2.3
Stress displacement relationship for a 8-node buckling panel (compressive stresses are positive)
3
b vj iy
uj
ix
3 b vj
2
(b) Stress Nodes
uj
6 4
3
b iy ix
PAGE 21 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
2. 2.1
2.1.1
Nominal stress range Nominal stress range due to wave torsional moment
The nominal stress range, in N/mm2, due to cross deck bending induced by wave torsion moments is to be obtained from the following formula:
WT = Q BH 2 FS FL 1000 WQ
where:
Q = 1000 u ( B H + bs ) 2.6 B H + 12 EI Q EAQ
DOC
L
i =1
H ,i B H ,i
MWT FS
: Maximum wave torsional moment, in kN.m, defined in Ch 4, Sec 3, [3.4.1], with fp = 0.5 : Stress correction factor, taken equal to:
FS = 5
FL
: Correction factor for longitudinal position of hatch corner, taken equal to:
FL = 1.75 x L
for 0.57 x / L 0.85 for x/L < 0.57 and x/L > 0.85
FL = 1.0
BH WQ IQ AQ bS
: Breadth of hatch opening, in m : Section modulus of the cross deck about z-axis, in m3, including upper stool, near hatch corner (see Fig 2) : Moment of inertia of the cross deck about z-axis, in m4, including upper stool, near the hatch corner (see Fig 2) : Shear area of the cross deck, in m2, including upper stool, near the hatch corner (see Fig 2) : Breadth of remaining deck strip on one side, in m, beside the hatch opening
PAGE 22 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
IT
: Torsion moment of inertia of ships cross section, in m4, calculated within cross deck area by neglecting upper and lower stool of the bulkhead (see Fig 1). It may be calculated according to App 1 : Sector coordinate, in m2, calculated at the same cross section as IT and at the Y and Z location of the hatch corner (see Fig 1) It may be calculated according to App 1 : Length of cargo area, in m, being the distance between engine room bulkhead and collision bulkhead : Breadth of hatch opening of hatch i, in m : Length of hatch opening of hatch i, in m
: Number of hatches.
PAGE 23 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
APPENDIX 1
1. 1.4
Calculation formulae Computation of cross sectional properties for the entire cross section
Asymmetric cross section: Symmetric cross section (only half of the section is modeled)
= =
ys
zs
Iy
= = = = =
Iz I yz IT
A S A S A I Az I Ay I Ay
z y
y z yz
ys
zs
Iy Iz zs
= = =
2 s 2 s s
A S A S A 2( I A z ) 2( I A y )
2
z y
y 2 s z 2 s
st3 3
IT
st3 + 2 A yi i 3 Cell i
0
I y
I z
= = = =
S A I A y I A z
y z s s
I y
yM zM
I I
I z I z I y I yz
2 I y I z I yz
= =
I z I yz I y I y Iy Iz
2 I yz 2 0 2 0
zM
I I
= = =
I y Iz
I A = I A
+ z m I y y M I z
2 I + z m I y
+ z M I y y M I z
2 I + z M I y
S S x , S y , S , I , I y and I z , I are to be computed with relation to shear centre M The sector-coordinate has to be transformed with respect to the location of the shear centre M. For cross sections of type A, 0 is to be added to each i and k as defined in [1.3] For cross sections of type B and C, can be calculated as follows: = O = z M ( y i ) y M (z i )
i = z M yi
PAGE 24 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
where:
: Calculated sector co-ordinate with respect to the centre of the coordinate system (O) selected for the calculation according to the formulae for k given in [1.3]
The transformed values of can be obtained by adding to the values of O obtained according to the formulae in [1.3]. The transformed value for is to be equal to zero at intersections of the cross section with the line of symmetry (centreline for ship-sections).
PAGE 25 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
In addition to the requirements in Ch 3, Sec 6, floors are to have web stiffeners sniped at the ends and spaced not more than approximately 1 m apart. The section modulus of web stiffeners is to be not less than 1.2 times that required in Ch 6, Sec 2, [4] 4.1.2
PAGE 26 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
2. 2.1
Equipment Stud link chain cables for anchors Diameter, in mm Total length, in m Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 220.0 14.0 12.5 220.0 16.0 14.0 247.5 17.5 16.0 247.5 19.0 17.5 275.0 20.5 17.5 275.0 22.0 19.0 302.5 24.0 20.5 302.5 26.0 22.0 20.5 330.0 28.0 24.0 22.0 357.5 30.0 26.0 24.0 357.5 32.0 28.0 24.0 385.0 34.0 30.0 26.0 385.0 36.0 32.0 28.0 412.5 38.0 34.0 30.0 412.5 40.0 34.0 30.0 440.0 42.0 36.0 32.0 440.0 44.0 38.0 34.0 440.0 46.0 40.0 36.0 467.5 48.0 42.0 36.0 467.5 50.0 44.0 38.0 467.5 52.0 46.0 40.0 495.0 54.0 48.0 42.0 495.0 56.0 50.0 44.0 495.0 58.0 50.0 46.0 522.5 60.0 52.0 46.0 522.5 62.0 54.0 48.0 522.5 64.0 56.0 50.0 550.0 66.0 58.0 50.0 550.0 68.0 60.0 52.0 550.0 70.0 62.0 54.0 577.5 73.0 64.0 56.0 577.5 76.0 66.0 58.0
Equipment number
Stockless anchors
EN A < EN B
A 50 70 90 110 130 150 175 205 240 280 320 360 400 450 500 550 600 660 720 780 840 910 980 1060 1140 1220 1300 1390 1480 1570 1670 1790 B 70 90 110 130 150 175 205 240 280 320 360 400 450 500 550 600 660 720 780 840 910 980 1060 1140 1220 1300 1390 1480 1570 1670 1790 1930
(1)
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
180 240 300 360 420 480 570 660 780 900 1020 1140 1290 1440 1590 1740 1920 2100 2280 2460 2640 2850 3060 3300 3540 3780 4050 4320 4590 4890 5250 5610
PAGE 27 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
Equipment number
Stockless anchors
EN A < EN B
A 1930 2080 2230 2380 2530 2700 2870 3040 3210 3400 3600 3800 4000 4200 4400 4600 4800 5000 5200 5500 5800 6100 6500 6900 7400 7900 8400 8900 9400 10000 10700 11500 12400 13400 14600 (1) See [3.2.4]. B 2080 2230 2380 2530 2700 2870 3040 3210 3400 3600 3800 4000 4200 4400 4600 4800 5000 5200 5500 5800 6100 6500 6900 7400 7900 8400 8900 9400 10000 10700 11500 12400 13400 14600 16000
(1)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
6000 6450 6900 7350 7800 8300 8700 9300 9900 10500 11100 11700 12300 12900 13500 14100 14700 15400 16100 16900 17800 18800 20000 21500 23000 24500 26000 27500 29000 31000 33000 35500 38500 42000 46000
Stud link chain cables for anchors Diameter, in mm Total length, in m Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 577.5 78.0 68.0 60.0 605.0 81.0 70.0 62.0 605.0 84.0 73.0 64.0 605.0 87.0 76.0 66.0 632.5 90.0 78.0 68.0 632.5 92.0 81.0 70.0 632.5 95.0 84.0 73.0 660.0 97.0 84.0 76.0 660.0 100.0 87.0 78.0 660.0 102.0 90.0 78.0 687.5 105.0 92.0 81.0 687.5 107.0 95.0 84.0 687.5 111.0 97.0 87.0 715.0 114.0 100.0 87.0 715.0 117.0 102.0 90.0 715.0 120.0 105.0 92.0 742.5 122.0 107.0 95.0 742.5 124.0 111.0 97.0 742.5 127.0 111.0 97.0 742.5 130.0 114.0 100.0 742.5 132.0 117.0 102.0 742.5 120.0 107.0 770.0 124.0 111.0 770.0 127.0 114.0 770.0 132.0 117.0 770.0 137.0 122.0 770.0 142.0 127.0 770.0 147.0 132.0 770.0 152.0 132.0 770.0 137.0 770.0 142.0 770.0 147.0 770.0 152.0 770.0 157.0 770.0 162.0
2.1.2
The equipment number EN is to be obtained from the following formula: EN = 2/3 2/3+ 2 h B + 0.1 A where:.
: Moulded displacement of the ship, in t, to the summer load waterline : Effective height, in m, from the summer load waterline to the top of the uppermost house, to be obtained in accordance with the following formula: h = a + hn When calculating h, sheer and trim are to be disregarded
: Freeboard amidships from the summer load waterline to the upper deck, in m
PAGE 28 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
hn
: Height, in m, at the centreline of tier n of superstructures or deckhouses having a breadth greater than B/4. Where a house having a breadth greater than B/4 is above a house with a breadth of B/4 or less, the upper house is to be included and the lower ignored : Area, in m2, in profile view, of the parts of the hull, superstructures and houses above the summer load waterline which are within the length L and also have a breadth greater than B/4
Fixed screens or bulwarks 1.5 m or more in height are to be regarded as parts of houses when determining h and A. In particular, the hatched area shown in Fig 1 is to be included. The height of hatch coamings and that of any deck cargo, such as containers, may be disregarded when determining h and A.
3.7 Windlass
3.7.9 Forces in the securing devices of windlasses due to green sea loads
Forces in the bolts, chocks and stoppers securing the windlass to the deck are to be calculated by considering the green sea loads specified in [3.7.8]. The windlass is supported by N bolt groups, each containing one or more bolts (see also Fig 3). The axial force Ri in bolt group (or bolt) i, positive in tension, is to be obtained, in kN, from the following formulae: where: Px Py : Force, in kN, acting normal to the shaft axis : Force, in kN, acting parallel to the shaft axis, either inboard or outboard, whichever gives the greater force in bolt group i H h xi, yi Ai Ix, Iy : Shaft height, in cm, above the windlass mounting : X and Y co-ordinates, in cm, of bolt group i from the centroid of all N bolt groups, positive in the direction opposite to that of the applied force : Cross-sectional area, in cm2, of all bolts in group I : Inertias, for N bolt groups, equal to: Ix = Ai xi2 Iy = Ai yi2 Ri Rsi : Static reaction force, in kN, at bolt group i, due to weight of windlass. Shear forces Fxi , Fyi applied to the bolt group i, and the resultant combined force Fi are to be obtained, in kN, from the following formulae: where: M N : Coefficient of friction, to be taken equal to 0.5 : Mass, in t, of windlass : Number of bolt groups.
PAGE 29 OF 35
Fxi = (Px - g M) / N
CORRIGENDA 4
Axial tensile and compressive forces and lateral forces calculated according to these requirements are also to be considered in the design of the supporting structure.
PAGE 30 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
1. 1.2
1.2.1
For cold forming (bending, flanging, beading) of plates the minimum average bending radius is to be not less than 3t (t = gross plate thickness as-built thickness). In order to prevent cracking, flame cutting flash or sheering burrs are to be removed before cold forming. After cold forming all structural components and, in particular, the ends of bends (plate edges) are to be examined for cracks. Except in cases where edge cracks are negligible, all cracked components are to be rejected. Repair welding is not permissible.
Table 1 Alignment (t, t1, and t2: as-built thickness) Detail Alignment of butt welds Standard Limit Remarks
a 0.15t a 0.2t
strength other
a 3.0 mm
a) Strength and higher tensile steel a t1 / 4 measured on the median a (5t1 3t2) / 6 measured on the heel line Where t2 is less than t1, then t2 should be substituted for t1.
b) Other a t1 / 2 measured on the median a (2 t1 t2) / 2 measured on the heel line Alignment of fillet welds a) Strength and higher tensile steel a t1 / 3 measured on the median
PAGE 31 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
Detail
Standard
Limit
Remarks
Note: strength means the following elements: strength deck, inner bottom, bottom, lower stool, lower part of transverse bulkhead, bilge hopper and side frames of single side bulk carriers. Alignment of face plates of T longitudinal a 0.04b strength a = 8.0 mm
Alignment of height of T-bar, L-angle bar or bulb a 0.15 t for primary supporting members a 0.2 t for ordinary stiffeners
3.0 mm
d L / 50
Note: strength means the following elements: strength deck, inner bottom, bottom, lower stool, lower part of transverse bulkhead, bilge hopper and side frames of single side bulk carriers.
PAGE 32 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
SECTION 2 WELDING
2. 2.2
2.2.2
In the case of welding of plates with a difference in gross thickness as-built thickness equal to or greater than 4 mm, the thicker plate is normally to be tapered. The taper has to have a length of not less than 3 times the difference in gross thickness as-built thickness.
2.6
2.6.1
Fillet welds
Kinds and size of fillet welds and their applications
Kinds and size of fillet welds for as-built thickness of abutting plating up to 50 mm are classed into 5 categories as given in Tab 1 and their application to hull construction is to be as required by Tab 2. In addition, for zones a and b of side frames as shown in Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 19, the weld throats are to be respectively 0.44t and 0.4t, where t is as-built thickness of the thinner of two connected members.
Table 1 Categories of fillet welds Category Kinds of fillet welds As-built gross thickness of abutting plate, t, in mm (1) Leg length of fillet weld, in mm (2) Length of fillet welds, in mm Pitch, in mm
F0 F1
Double continuous weld Double continuous weld Double continuous weld Double continuous weld
0.7t 0.5t + 1.0 0.4t + 2.0 0.3t + 4.0 0.4t + 1.0 0.3t + 2.0 0.2t + 4.0 0.3t + 1.0 0.2t + 2.0 0.1t + 4.0 0.5t + 1.0 0.4t + 2.0
F2
F3
F4
Intermittent weld
75
300
20 t 0.3t + 4.0 (1) t is as-built thickness of the thinner of two connected members (2) Leg length of fillet welds is made fine adjustments corresponding to the corrosion addition tC specified in Ch 3, Sec 3, Tab 1 as follows: + 1.0 mm for t C > 5 + 0.5 mm - 0.5 mm for 5 tC 4 for tC < 4
5 tC > 4
tC 3
PAGE 33 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
Table 2 Application of fillet welds Connection Of To Watertight plate Boundary plating Brackets at ends of members Deep tank bulkheads Ordinary stiffener Cut-out in way of primary supporting members and collar plates General, Web of primary supporting members and collar unless plates otherwise Plating (Except deep tank bulkhead) specified in Web of ordinary At ends (15% of span) Face plates of builtstiffener the table up stiffeners Elsewhere End of primary supporting members Deck plate, shell plate, inner bottom plate, bulkhead plate and ordinary stiffeners Ordinary stiffener Bottom and inner bottom plating Shell plates in strengthened bottom forward Center girder Inner bottom plate and shell plate except the above Side girder including intercostal Bottom and inner bottom plating plate Bottom and Shell plates and At ends, on a length equal to double inner bottom plates two frame spaces bottom Floor Center girder and side girders in way of hopper tanks Elsewhere Bracket on center Center girder, inner bottom and shell plates girder Web stiffener Floor and girder Side and inner side Web of primary Side plating, inner side plating and web of primary in double supporting members supporting members side structure Hull area Category
F1 F1 F3 F2 F4 F2 F4 F0 F3 F1 F2 F3 F2 F2 F3 F2 F3
F2
Side frame and end bracket Tripping bracket Strength deck t 13 t < 13 Other deck
Side shell plate Side shell plate and side frame Side shell plating within 0.6L midship Elsewhere Side shell plating Side shell plating Ordinary stiffeners Deck plating At corners of hatchways for 15% of the hatch length Elsewhere
Deck
PAGE 34 OF 35
CORRIGENDA 4
Hull area
Category
Boundaries Bulkhead plating Shell plating, deck plating, inner bottom plating, bulkhead
Swash bulkheads At ends (25% of span), where no end brackets are fitted At end (15% of span) Elsewhere
F3 F1 F1 F2 F2 F2 F3 F2 F1 F1 F2 F1 F1 F1 F1 F3 F2
Bulkheads
Ordinary stiffener
After peak
Internal members
Seating
In tanks, and located within 0.125L from fore peak Face plate Face area exceeds 65 cm2 Elsewhere Boundaries and each other In way of main engine, thrust Bed plate bearing, boiler bearers and main generator engines In way of main engine and Girder plate thrust bearing Inner bottom plate In way of main engine and and shell thrust bearing Deck Heel and head Deck Vertical frames forming main piece Rudder plate Rudder frames except above
PAGE 35 OF 35
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 1 OF 4
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1.
2. 2.2
2.2.4
The equation describing the load-end shortening curve CR1- for the beam column buckling of ordinary stiffeners composing the hull girder transverse section is to be obtained from the following formula (see Fig 3):
CR1 = C1
where:
AStif
: Edge function defined in [2.2.3] : Net sectional area of the stiffener, in cm2, without attached plating : Critical stress, in N/mm2, equal to:
C1
C1 =
E1
ReH 4 E1
for E1
ReH 2
C1 = ReH 1
C1 = ReH 1
ReH 4 E1
for E1 >
ReH 2
E1
: Relative strain defined in [2.2.3] : Euler column buckling stress, in N/mm2, equal to:
E1 = 2 E
IE bE1
IE AE l 2
10 4
: Net moment of inertia of ordinary stiffeners, in cm4, with attached shell plating of width bE1 : Effective width, in m, of the attached shell plating, equal to:
b E1 = s
bE1 = s
E = 10 3
AE
s tp
ReH
E
: Net sectional area, in cm2, of ordinary stiffeners with attached shell plating of width bE
PAGE 2 OF 4
bE
CR 2 =
where:
AStif
: Edge function defined in [2.2.3] : Net sectional area of the stiffener, in cm2, without attached plating : Critical stress, in N/mm2, equal to:
C2
C2 =
E2
ReH 4 E 2
for E 2
ReH 2
C 2 = ReH 1
C 2 = ReH 1
ReH 4 E 2
for E 2 >
ReH 2
E2 CP
: Euler torsional buckling stress, in N/mm2, defined in Ch 6, Sec 3, [4.3] : Relative strain defined in [2.2.3] : Buckling stress of the attached plating, in N/mm2, equal to:
2 CP = E E 2.25 1.25 ReH
CP = ReH
2.2.7 Web local buckling of ordinary stiffeners made of flat bars The equation describing the load-end shortening curve CR4- for the web local buckling of flat bar ordinary
stiffeners composing the hull girder transverse section is to be obtained from the following formula (see Fig 5):
CR 4 =
where:
AStif
: Edge function defined in [2.2.3] : Net sectional area of the stiffener, in cm2, without attached plating : Buckling stress of the attached plating, in N/mm2, defined in [2.2.5]
CP
PAGE 3 OF 4
C4
C4 =
E4
ReH 4 E 4
for E 4
ReH 2
C 4 = ReH 1
C 4 = ReH 1
ReH 4 E 4
for E 4 >
ReH 2
E4
E 4 = 160000
tw hw
CR 5
CR 5
where:
PAGE 4 OF 4
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 1 OF 8
2.1 Main assumptions of the method The hull girder is treated as a beam subjected exclusively to bending, excluding shear. It corresponds to the assumption of the cross section remaining plane during loading. The method adopted uses the so-called "component approach" and is based on the following simplifying assumptions: each cross section is made of an assembly of independent elements or components (plates and stiffened plates), transverse cross-sections of the ship hull remain plane after deformation and perpendicular, to the neutral surface, which enables to calculate for any curvature the strain according to the following formula : = z (z distance from the element under consideration to the neutral axis), collapse occurs for panels located between two adjacent transverse primary members, elasto-plastic behaviour of each panel is determined under tension and compression; influence of shear stresses is neglected. The method takes also advantage of the possibility to determine for each panel its load-end shortening curve CR1-, as indicated hereafter. 2.2 Determination of the load-end shortening curve CR1- beam column buckling The Euler column buckling stress is taken as:
E = 2
E I e' 10 4 Ae l 2
where I e' : moment of inertia, in cm4, of the stiffener with attached plating of width be taken as: be' =
1.125 b
Ae : cross sectional area, in cm, of the stiffener with an attached plating of width be taken as:
2.25 1.25 be = 2 b e e b = b e
for for
e 1.25
e =
e < 1.25
b tp
c1
E
tp : thickness of attached plating l: span of stiffeners Since the effective width be of attached plating may be calculated for any strain level by considering the generalized slenderness of plating e ( ) :
PAGE 2 OF 8
2.25 1.25 2 be ( ) = ( ) ( ) b e e b ( ) = b e
for for
the Euler column buckling stress can be expressed as: E I e' ( ) E ( ) = 2 Ae ( ) l 2 where as
I e' = moment of inertia of the stiffener with attached plating of width be' ( ) taken be' ( ) =
1.125 b
e ( )
If we assume that the Johnson-Ostenfeld correction is applicable to any edge stress the maximum stress that the stiffener with attached plate of width be ( ) can sustain is:
max ( ) = 1
= ( ) 1 ( ) Y e e e Y 4 E ( ) 4 E ( )
for for
E ( ) e E ( ) e
max ( ) = E ( )
where
e ( ) =
e . Y
The e ( ) is defined as e ( ) =
max ( ) = e ( ) 1
Y 4 e ( ) 1
max ( ) = e ( ) e ( ) Y
where
e ( ) =
E ( ) e
For any relative strain , the average stress av in the stiffener with attached plate of width
be ( ) is given by
(A
Stif
+ b t p ) av = AStif + be ( ) t p max ( )
av = e ( )
for for
av = e ( ) e ( )
CSR for Bulk Carriers, av = CR1 and y = ReH, so the formulae are as follows:
CR1 = e ( )
for
e ( ) > 0.5
PAGE 3 OF 8
CR1 = e ( )
for
E ( ) > 0.5 e
for
CR1 = e ( ) C1
where
E ( ) > 0.5 e
C1 = ReH 1
e and e = ReH 4 E ( )
for for
CR1 = e ( ) C1
where
AStif + be ( ) t p AStif + b t p
ReH 4 E ( )
for
E ( ) >
E ( ) >
ReH 2
ReH 2
ReH 2
modified to
C1 = ReH 1
the
Therefore,
formula
C1
for
E1 >
is
C1 = ReH 1
ReH 1 4 ( ) E
E ( ) 0.5 e E ( ) E ( ) E ( ) E ( )
ReH 2 ReH 2 ReH 2 ReH 2
CR1 = e ( ) C1
where
C1 =
E ( )
The proposed modification of the formula for the load-end shortening curve of torsional buckling and web local buckling of ordinary stiffeners made of flat bars can be obtained by the same manner mentioned above. 2.3 Determination of the load-end shortening curve CR1- plate buckling The ultimate strength for plate panel element is approximated by the following formula.
PAGE 4 OF 8
b cr = a
where
1 1 + 2 0
0 =
b Y t E
As for transversely stiffened panels, the above equation can be generalised to any edge stress e according to:
max ( ) = w ( ) e = e ( ) w ( ) Y
where
b w ( ) = a
1 1 + 2 ( ) e
e ( ) = 0 e = e ( ) y
In CSR for Bulk Carriers, max = CR5 and y = ReH,, a = l and b = s, so the formula is as follows:
s CR 5 ( ) = e ( ) l
1 1 + 2 ( ) e
ReH
In addition, ultimate strength of transversely stiffened panels is controlled by the yielding stress of the material. Therefore, CR 5 is modified to CR 5
from CR 5
3.
Impact on Scantling
3.1 The effect due to the modification of formula At first, the investigation was carried out how this modification of the formula affects the load-end shortening curve. The load-shortening curve was calculated for the following stiffened panel and plate. The material of all plates and stiffeners is HT32. Type of stiffener or plate Size of stiffener Size of plate Angle T-Bar Flat Bar 300x17.0 2400x800x25.0 Plate 800x8000x15.0
PAGE 5 OF 8
The Fig.1 shows the results of load-shortening curve. In Fig.1, the solid line is the modified one and the broken line is the current one, and vertical line means the relative stress and horizontal line means the relative strain.
(a) Angle
(b) T-Bar
(d) Plate
Fig.1 The results of load-shortening curve As shown in Fig. 1 (a), (b) and (c), the load-shortening curve for the longitudinal stiffened panel is not affected by this modification. However, as shown in Fig. 1 (d), the load-shortening curve for the buckling of plate (transversely stiffened panel) is affected by this modification, especially critical stress is decreased. In order to investigate a large decrease in critical stress for the plate due to the modification of the formulae, additional calculation of the load-shortening curve of the plate with different aspect ratio and thickness as given in the table below is carried out. Aspect ratio = 3 2400 * 800*15.0, HT32 2400 * 800*20.0, HT32 Aspect ratio = 5 4000 * 800*15.0, HT32 4000 * 800*20.0, HT32 Aspect ratio = 10 8000 * 800*15.0, HT32 8000 * 800*20.0, HT32
The comparisons on load-shortening curves of plates with 3 different aspect ratio subjected to transverse thrust are shown in Fig.2.
PAGE 6 OF 8
(c) Aspect ratio = 3 (2400*800) Fig.2 The comparison results on load-shortening curves of plates with 3 different aspect ratio
PAGE 7 OF 8
From Fig. 2, it is found that the load-shortening curve for buckling of plate decrease due to the modification of the formulae. From these results, it is obvious that this modification does not give the impact for Double side skin BC with longitudinal framing system. 3.2 Scantling impact due to this modification According to the results specified in 3.1, it was found that this modification affects the scantling of ships with transversely framing system. Then the scantling impact calculation was carried out for the following three kinds of single side skin BCs, i.e., Handy Max, Panamax and Cape size. In addition, the scantling impact calculation was carried out for one double side skin BC for reference. The ultimate bending moment capacities obtained by the modified formula were compared with those of the current one as given in the table below. The scantling impact due to this modification was calculated based on the following assumption. (1) The ultimate bending moment capacity of each ship calculated according to the current formula is equal to the required value. (2) In order to satisfy with the required ultimate bending moment capacity, only the thickness of upper deck plating is increased. Because as the deck plating is located apart from the neutral axis of transverse section, increasing the thickness of deck plating is very effective to improve the ultimate hull girder bending capacity. (3) The scantling calculation is calculated based on the increase of the transverse section area within 0.4 L amidships. The scantling increase due to this modification was also given in the table. Ratio (=Modification/ current) 96.1 % 97.6% 98.4% 100.0% Difference of ultimate bending moment capacities -3.9% -2.4% -1.6% 0.0% Scantling increase 0.82 % 0.68% 0.58% 0.0%
SSS Handy max SSS Panamax SSS Cape size DSS Cape size
*****
End
*****
PAGE 8 OF 8
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 1 OF 7
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice 2.
9. 9.5
9.5.2
9.5.3 Clear of openings, adequate continuity of strength of longitudinal hatch coamings is to be ensured by under deck girders. At hatchway corners, the face plate of hatch coamings and longitudinal deck girders or their extension parts provided under deck in line with hatch coamings and the face plates of hatch end beams girders on both sides are to be effectively connected so as to maintain the continuity in strength.
9.6
9.6.3
PAGE 2 OF 7
twice the transverse dimension, in the fore and aft direction. Where insert plates are required, their net thickness is to be obtained, in mm, from the following formula:
t INS = (0.8 + 0.4l / b ) t without being taken less than t or greater than 1.6t where:
l : b : t :
Width, in m, in way of the corner considered, of the cross deck strip between two consecutive hatchways, measured in the longitudinal direction (see Fig 23) Width, in m, of the hatchway considered, measured in the transverse direction (see Fig 23) Actual net thickness, in mm, of the deck at the side of the hatchways.
For the extreme corners of end hatchways, the thickness of insert plates is to be 60% greater than the actual thickness of the adjacent deck plating. A lower thickness may be accepted by the Society on the basis of calculations showing that stresses at hatch corners are lower than permissible values. Where insert plates are required, the arrangement is shown in Fig 25, in which d1, d2, d3 and d4 are to be greater than the ordinary stiffener spacing. For hatchways located outside the cargo area, a reduction in the thickness of the insert plates in way of corners may be considered by the Society on a case by case basis. For ships having length L of 150 m or above, the corner radius, the thickness and the extent of insert plate may be determined by the results of a direct strength assessment according to Ch 7, Sec 2 and Sec 3, including buckling check and fatigue strength assessment of hatch corners according to Ch 8, Sec 5.
Figure 25:
PAGE 3 OF 7
2. 2.1
2.1.2
However, for the purpose of design, it is acceptable if, in each condition at departure, arrival and, where required by [2.1.1], any intermediate condition, the tanks intended to be partially filled are assumed to be empty and full. In addition, the specified partly filled level in the intended condition is to be considered. To demonstrate compliance with all filling levels between empty and full, it will be acceptable if, in each condition at departure, arrival, and where required by [2.1.1], any intermediate condition, the tanks intended to be partially filled are assumed to be: empty full partially filled at intended level
Where multiple tanks are intended to be partially filled, all combinations of empty, full or partially filled at intended level for those tanks are to be investigated.
2.1.4
Sequential ballast water exchange Requirements of [2.1.2] and [2.1.3] are not applicable to ballast water exchange using the sequential method.
PAGE 4 OF 7
5.
5.1
5.1.3
Hull structures Between the horn intersection with the shell and the peak tank top, the vertical extension of the hull structures is to be not less than the horn height, defined as the distance from the horn intersection with the shell to the mid-point of the lower horn gudgeon. The vertical extension of hull structure to support the rudder horn between the horn intersection with the shell and the peak tank top is in accordance with the requirements of Ch 10, Sec 1, [9.2.6] and [9.2.7]. The thickness of the structures adjacent to the rudder horn, such as shell plating, floors, platforms and side girders, the centreline bulkhead and any other structures, is to be adequately increased in relation to the horn scantlings.
5.
5.1 5.1.1
Superstructure end bulkheads and deckhouse walls End bulkheads of superstructure and deckhouse
Application
The requirements in 5.2 and 5.3 apply to end bulkhead of superstructure and deckhouse superstructure end bulkheads and deckhouse walls forming the only protection for openings, are required by ILLC as amended, and for accommodation.
5.3
Scantling
5.3.1
Stiffeners The section modulus w, in cm3, and the shear area Ash, in cm2, of the stiffeners is not to be less than the value obtained from the following formula:
w = 0.35kp A sl 2 This requirement assume the webs of lowest tier stiffeners to be efficiently welded to the decks. Scantlings for other types of end connections may be specially considered.
PAGE 5 OF 7
The section modulus of deckhouse side stiffeners needs not to be greater than that of side frames on the deck situated directly below; taking account of spacing s and span l.
PAGE 6 OF 7
1.
1.2
General
Definitions
1.2.2
Substantial corrosion Substantial corrosion is an extent of corrosion such that assessment of the corrosion pattern indicates a wastage in excess of 75% of allowable margins but within acceptable limits gauged (or measured) thickness between trenewal and trenewal + treserve. The allowable margin is the total corrosion addition tC, as defined in Ch 3, Sec 3.
PAGE 7 OF 7
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 1 OF 7
Chapter 3/Section 6/9.5.2 This change is made to clarify the requirement. In order to clarify the requirement, the first sentence is moved to 9.5.3. 2. Impact on Scantling
There is no change in terms of the steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule change.
Chapter 3/Section 6/9.5.3 The change is made to clarify the requirement. The word the face plate of was deleted, taking into account the current design of BC. 2. Impact on Scantling
There is no change in terms of the steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule change.
PAGE 2 OF 7
Corner of hatchways
Chapter 3/Section 6/9.6.3 For ships having length L of 150 m and above, FEA including buckling check, hull girder ultimate strength check and fatigue check of hatch corners are required by the CSR for bulk carriers. Therefore, it is considered that the extent of insert plate can be determined based on such evaluation result in lieu of the requirement of this sub-section.
2.
Impact on Scantling
There may be slight change in terms of the steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule change. In any case, however, there is no influence for on the structural integrity of the ship.
PAGE 3 OF 7
Chapter 4/Section 3/2.1.2 and 2.1.4 This rule change is made to be in line with the revision 5 (Jan 2005) of IACS UR S11. The last 2 sentences of [2.1.2] and new paragraph [2.1.4] correspond to the applicable parts of IACS UR S11.2.1.3 and S11.2.1.5 respectively.
2.
Impact on Scantling
The rule change proposal has no impact on scantling as the IACS UR S11 should have been applied by designer. No consequence assessment is considered necessary.
PAGE 4 OF 7
Hull structures
Chapter 9/Section 2/5.1.3 A significant number of questions and comments have been raised with respect to the vertical extension of the internals in way of the rudder horn (e.g., aft peak floors). When the vertical extension is required not to be less than the horn height, defined as the distance from the horn intersection with the shell to the mid-point of the lower horn gudgeon, it is quite different from the current designs and designers have indicated that this is excessive. The change is made so that the required vertical extension becomes practical and a cross reference to the floor and girder requirements of Ch.10, Sec.1 [9.2.6] and 9.2.7] is provided. The requirements of Ch.10, Sec.1 [9.2.6] through [9.2.10] include general prescriptive requirements for the strengthening and alignment of floors and girders in way of the rudder horn. These prescriptive requirements have been shown to provide adequate stiffness in the stern construction area in order to support the rudder forces and to prevent unfavourable hull vibration due to the propeller wake, as they are similar to the existing rules which have resulted in sufficient structure. The aft peak structure in the vicinity of the attachment of horn, peak tank plate and closely spaced floors, can fairly distribute rudder force into hull structures. As is the case with any other part of the structure, unless there is some unusual or novel arrangement, further detailed analytical checks are not considered necessary. The connection of the rudder horn is handled in CSR for Double Hull Oil Tankers 8/5.2.2.3 and are fairly similar to the above mentioned Ch.10 Sec. 1 [9.2.6] through [9.2.10].
2.
Impact on Scantling
There may be slight change in terms of the steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule change. In any case, however, there is no influence on the structural integrity of the ship.
Application
Considering the comments from Technical Committee, the editorial correction of the title of Ch 9 Sec 4 [5] and the text of Ch 9 Sec 4 [5.1.1] is made to be in line with IACS UR S 3.
Stiffeners
There is no formula for required shear area for stiffeners of end bulkheads of superstructure and deckhouses. Therefore, the corresponding words are deleted.
PAGE 5 OF 7
There is no formula for required shear area for stiffeners of superstructure end bulkheads and deckhouses wall. Therefore, the corresponding words are deleted. 2. Impact on Scantling
There is no change in terms of the steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule change.
PAGE 6 OF 7
Substantial corrosion
Chapter 13/Section 1/1.2.2 This change is made to be consistent with Chapter 13/Section 2/3.2.2 and IACS UR Z10.2.1.2.11 (Rev. 22 June 2006).
2.
Impact on Scantling
There is no change in terms of the steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule change.
*****
End
*****
PAGE 7 OF 7
CORRIGENDA 5
Notes: (1) These Rule Corrigenda enter into force on 1 April 2006 (2) This document contains a copy of the affected rule along with the editorial change or clarification noted as applicable. (3) Users are reminded that the formula in Chapter 5, Appendix 1, 2.2.8, was corrected by Rule Change Notice No.1, November 2007.
Details about the IACS CSR Knowledge Centre (KC) ID Numbers can be found on the IACS CSR web site (www.iacs.org.uk) under the headings of Questions and Answers and Common Interpretations.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 1 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
Symbols
Ships main data
PAGE 2 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
Ref. IMO Technical Provisions, 3.6 (Resolution MSC.158(78)) The width of inclined ladders between stringers is to be not less than 400 mm. The treads are to be equally spaced at a distance apart, measured vertically, of between 200 mm and 300 mm. When steel is used, the treads are to be formed of two square bars of not less that than 22 mm by 22 mm in section, fitted to form a horizontal step with the edges pointing upward. The treads are to be carried through the side stringers and attached thereto by double continuous welding. All inclined ladders are to be provided with handrails of substantial construction on both sides, fitted at a convenient distance above the treads.
PAGE 3 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
2.3.7
In specific cases, such as [2.3.6] [2.3.8], with regard to stress distribution along the hull girder, the classes required within 0.4L amidships may be extended beyond that zone, on a case by case basis.
PAGE 4 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
Table 4 Application of material classes and grades Structural member category Material class Within 0.4L Outside 0.4L amidship amidship
SECONDARY Longitudinal bulkhead strakes, other than that belonging to the Primary category I A/AH Deck Plating exposed to weather, other than that belonging to the Primary or Special category Side plating (7) PRIMARY Bottom plating, including keel plate Strength deck plating, excluding that belonging to the Special category Continuous longitudinal members above strength deck, II A/AH excluding hatch coamings Uppermost strake in longitudinal bulkhead Vertical strake (hatch side girder) and uppermost sloped strake in top wing tank SPECIAL Sheer strake at strength deck (1), (6) Stringer plate in strength deck (1), (6) Deck strake at longitudinal bulkhead (6) Strength deck plating at corners of cargo hatch openings in bulk carriers, ore carriers, combination carriers and other II ships with similar hatch openings configuration (2) III (I outside 0.6L Bilge strake (3), (4), (6) amidships) Longitudinal hatch coamings of length greater than 0.15L (5) Web of lower bracket of side frame of single side bulk carriers having additional service feature BC-A or BC-B (5) End brackets and deck house transition of longitudinal cargo hatch coamings (5) Notes: (1) Not to be less than grade E/EH within 0.4L amidships in ships with length exceeding 250 m. (2) Not to be less than class III within 0.6L amidships and class II within the remaining length of the cargo region. (3) May be of class II in ships with a double bottom over the full breadth and with length less than 150 m. (4) Not to be less than grade D/DH within 0.4L amidships in ships with length exceeding 250 m. (5) Not to be less than grade D/DH. (6) Single strakes required to be of class III or of grade E/EH and within 0.4L amidships are to have breadths, in m, not less than 0.8 + 0.005L, need not be greater than 1.8 m, unless limited by the geometry of the ship's design. (7) For BC-A and BC-B ships with single side skin structures, side shell strakes included totally or partially between the two points located to 0.125l above and below the intersection of side shell and bilge hopper sloping plate are not to be less than grade D/DH, l being the frame span.
PAGE 5 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
8.
8.3
8.3.1 General
Frames are to be built-up symmetrical sections with integral upper and lower brackets and are to be arranged with soft toes. The side frame flange is to be curved (not knuckled) at the connection with the end brackets. The radius of curvature is not to be less than r, in mm, given by:
r= 0.3b 2 f t f + tC
r=
0.4b 2 f t f + tC
bf and tf : Flange width and net thickness of the curved flange, in mm. The end of the flange is to be sniped. In ships less than 190 m in length, mild steel frames may be asymmetric and fitted with separate brackets. The face plate or flange of the bracket is to be sniped at both ends. Brackets are to be arranged with soft toes. The dimensions of side frames are defined in Fig 19.
Reason for the Rule Clarification: This correction is made to be in line with IACS UR S12. (Refer to KC ID 564)
10.
10.4
Bulkhead structure
Corrugated bulkhead
PAGE 6 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
The net thickness and material of the stool top plate are to be not less than those required for the bulkhead plating above. The thickness and material properties of the upper portion of vertical or sloping stool side plating within the depth equal to the corrugation flange width from the stool top are to be not less than the required flange plate thickness and material to meet the bulkhead stiffness requirement at the lower end of the corrugation. The ends of stool side ordinary stiffeners, when fitted in a vertical plane, are to be attached to brackets at the upper and lower ends of the stool. The distance d from the edge of the stool top plate to the surface of the corrugation flange is to be in accordance with Fig 30. The stool bottom is to be installed in line with double bottom floors or girders as the case may be, and is to have a width not less than 2.5 times the mean depth of the corrugation. The stool is to be fitted with diaphragms in line with the longitudinal double bottom girders or floors as the case may be, for effective support of the corrugated bulkhead. Scallops in the brackets and diaphragms in way of the connections to the stool top plate are to be avoided. Where corrugations are cut at the lower stool, corrugated bulkhead plating is to be connected to the stool top plate by full penetration welds. The stool side plating is to be connected to the stool top plate and the inner bottom plating by either full penetration or deep penetration welds. The supporting floors are to be connected to the inner bottom by either full penetration or deep penetration weld. The weld of corrugations and stool side plating to the stool top plate are to be full penetration one. The weld of stool side plating and supporting floors to the inner bottom plating are to be full penetration or deep penetration welds.
PAGE 7 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
p = 2.5
p = 12.5
3.4
3.4.1
The lateral pressure, in kN/m2, for determining the scantlings is to be obtained from the greater of the following formulae:
p A = nc[bC ( z T )] p A = p A min
where: n : Coefficient defined in Tab 7, depending on the tier level. The lowest tier is normally that tier which is directly situated above the uppermost continuous deck to which the depth D is to be measured. However, where the actual distance (D-T) exceeds the minimum non-corrected tabular freeboard according to ILLC as amended by at least one standard superstructure height as defined in Ch 1, Sec 4, [3.18.1], this tier may be defined as the 2nd tier and the tier above as the 3rd tier c : Coefficient taken equal to:
c = 0.3 + 0.7 b1 B1
For exposed parts of machinery casings, c is not to be taken less than 1.0
b1 B1
: Breadth of deckhouse at the position considered : Actual maximum breadth of ship on the exposed weather deck at the position considered.
b1 B1 is not to be taken less than 0.25
b x
: Coefficient defined in Tab 8 : X co-ordinate, in m, of the calculation point for the bulkhead considered. When determining sides of a deckhouse, the deckhouse is to be subdivided into parts of approximately equal length, not exceeding
0.15 L each, and x is to be taken as the X co-ordinate of the centre of each part considered.
: Z co-ordinate, in m, of the midpoint of stiffener span, or to the middle of the plate field
PAGE 8 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
: Span, in m, to be taken as the superstructure height or deckhouse height respectively, and not less than 2.0 m : Minimum lateral pressure, in kN/m2, defined in Tab 9.
pAmin
Elsewhere (1)
90 < L 250
L > 250
th
12.5 +
25
L 20
50
(1) For the 4 tier and above, p A min is to be taken equal to 2.5 12.5kN/m2.
where: p S, p W K : Hydrostatic pressure and maximum hydrodynamic pressures among load cases H, F, R and P, calculated in normal ballast condition at TB : Coefficient taken equal to:
K= c FL 0.2V + 0.6 L
cFL
PAGE 9 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
Where, the flare angle at the load calculation point is to be measured in plane of the frame between a vertical line and the tangent to the side shell plating. (see Fig 7)
Flare angle
load calculation point
z
TB
C L
PAGE 10 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
1 1,ALL
where:
1,ALL
130 1, ALL = k 2 190 1500 x 1, ALL = 0 .3 k k L 190 1, ALL = k 2 190 1500 x 1, ALL 0 .7 k k L 130 1, ALL = k
x 0.1 L x 0.1 < < 0.3 L x 0.3 0.7 L x 0.7 < < 0.9 L x 0.9 L
4. 4.5
4.5.1
When a material factor for higher strength steel is used in calculating the required section modulus at bottom or deck according to [4.2] or [4.3], the relevant higher strength steel is to be adopted for all members contributing to the longitudinal strength (see [1]), at least up to a vertical distance, in m, obtained from the following formulae: above the baseline (for section modulus at bottom):
VHB =
1B k 1, ALL z 1B + 1D D
PAGE 11 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
below a horizontal line located at a distance VD (see [1.4.2]) above the neutral axis of the hull transverse section (for section modulus at deck):
VHD =
where:
1D k 1, ALL (N + VD ) 1B + 1D
1B, 1D : Normal stresses, in N/mm2, at bottom and deck, respectively, calculated according to [2.1.2]
zD
: Z co-ordinate, in m, of the strength deck defined in [1.3], with respect to the reference co-ordinate system defined in Ch 1, Sec 4, [4]
PAGE 12 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
Symbols
For symbols not defined in this Appendix, refer to Ch 1, Sec 4.
IY
: Moment of inertia, in m4, of the hull transverse section around its horizontal neutral axis, to be calculated according to Ch 5, Sec 1, [1.5.1] Section moduli, in cm3 m3 at bottom and deck, respectively, defined in Ch 5, Sec 1, [1.4.2].
ZAB, ZAD :
the ultimate strength is calculated at hull transverse sections between two adjacent transverse webs. the hull girder transverse section remains plane during each curvature increment. the hull material has an elasto-plastic behaviour. the hull girder transverse section is divided into a set of elements, which are considered to act independently. These elements are: transversely framed plating panels and/or ordinary stiffeners with attached plating, whose structural behaviour is described in [2.2.1] hard corners, constituted by plating crossing, whose structural behaviour is described in [2.2.2].
according to the iterative procedure, the bending moment Mi acting on the transverse section at each curvature value i is obtained by summing the contribution given by the stress acting on each element. The stress , corresponding to the element strain , is to be obtained for each curvature increment from the nonlinear load-end shortening curves - - of the element. These curves are to be calculated, for the failure mechanisms of the element, from the formulae specified in [2.2]. The stress is selected as the lowest among the values obtained from each of the considered load-end shortening curves - .
The procedure is to be repeated until the value of the imposed curvature reaches the value F, in m-1, in hogging and sagging condition, obtained from the following formula:
F = 0.003
where:
MY EI Y
MY : the lesser of the values MY1 and MY2, in kN.m: MY1 = 10-3 ReH ZAB MY1 = 103 ReH ZAB
PAGE 13 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
If the value F is not sufficient to evaluate the peaks of the curve M-, the procedure is to be repeated until the value of the imposed curvature permits the calculation of the maximum bending moments of the curve.
2.2 Load-end shortening curves - 2.2.6 Web local buckling of ordinary stiffeners made of flanged profiles
The equation describing the load-end shortening curve CR1- CR3- for the web local buckling of flanged ordinary stiffeners composing the hull girder transverse section is to be obtained from the following formula:
10 3 bE t p + hwe t w + b f t f 10 3 st p + hw t w + b f t f
CR 3 = ReH
where
bE hwe
: Edge function defined in [2.2.3] : Effective width, in m, of the attached shell plating, defined in [2.2.4] : Effective height, in mm, of the web, equal to:
2.25 1.25 2 hw hwe = w w hwe = hw
w =
hw tw
ReH
E
CR 5
where:
E = 10 3
s tp
ReH
E
PAGE 14 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
PAGE 15 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
2.5.3 Net thickness of the sheer strake in way of breaks of long effective superstructures
The net thickness of the sheer strake is to be increased in way of breaks of long effective superstructures occurring within 0.5L amidships, over a length of about one sixth of the ships breadth on each side of the superstructure end. This increase in net thickness is to be equal to 40% of the net thickness of sheer strake, but need not exceed 4.5 mm. Where the breaks of superstructures occur outside 0.5L amidships, the increase in net thickness may be reduced to 30%, but need not exceed 2.5 mm.
2.5.4 Net thickness of the sheer strake in way of breaks of short non-effective superstructures
The net thickness of the sheer strake is to be increased in way of breaks of short non-effective superstructures occurring within 0.6L amidships, over a length of about one sixth of the ships breadth on each side of the superstructure end. This increase in net thickness is to be equal to 15% of the net thickness of sheer strake, but need not exceed 4.5 mm.
PAGE 16 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
3.4 Upper and lower connections of side frames of single side bulk carriers 3.4.1
The section moduli of the:
side shell and hopper tank longitudinals that support the lower connecting brackets, side shell and topside tank longitudinals that support the upper connecting brackets
are to be such that the following relationship is separately satisfied for each lower and upper connecting bracket (see also Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 22):
2 ( p S + pW )l 2 l 1
w d
i n
16 RY
where: n : Number of the longitudinal stiffeners of side shell and hopper / topside tank that support the lower / upper end connecting bracket of the side frame, as applicable wi di : Net section modulus, in cm3, of the i-th longitudinal stiffener of the side shell or hopper / topside tank that support the lower / upper end connecting bracket of the side frame, as applicable : Distance, in m, of the above i-th longitudinal stiffener from the intersection point of the side shell and hopper /topside tank l1 Ry : Spacing, in m, of transverse supporting webs in hopper / topside tank, as applicable : Lowest value of equivalent yield stress, in N/mm2, among the materials of the longitudinal stiffeners of side shell and hopper / topside tanks that support the lower / upper end connecting bracket of the side frame
T = 150 for the longitudinal stiffeners supporting the lower connecting brackets T = 75 for the longitudinal stiffeners supporting the upper connecting brackets
l : Side frame span, in m, as defined in [3.3.1].
pS , pW : Still water and wave pressures as those for the side frame.
PAGE 17 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
175
where:
cos
for stiffeners in the double bottom or double side space (see Fig 8) for other cases (e.g. hopper tank, top side tank, etc.) (see Fig 8)
K longi : Coefficient considering shape of cross section of the longitudinal, taken equal to:
for symmetrical profile of stiffener (e.g. T-section, flat bar) for asymmetrical profile of stiffener (e.g. angle section, bulb profile)
: Coefficient considering the shape of the end of the stiffener, taken equal to:
K stiff = 1.0
K stiff = 0.8
for standard shape of the end of the stiffener (see Fig 9) for the improved shape of the end of the stiffener (see Fig 9)
: As given in Fig 10 : Stress range, in N/mm2, transferred from longitudinals into the end of web stiffener, as obtained from the following formula:
= 2W 0.322h' [( Aw1 l 1 ) + ( Aw 2 l 2 )] + As 0
: Maximum inertial pressure due to liquid in the considered compartment where the web stiffener
is located according to Ch 4 Sec 6 [2.2.1], in kN/m2, of the probability level of 10-4, calculated at mid-span of the ordinary stiffener
l
As 0 , Aw1 , Aw 2 : Geometric parameters as given in Fig 10, in mm2 l 1 , l 2 : Geometric parameters as given in Fig 10, in mm
PAGE 18 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
h'
hs h0 '
b'
: Smallest breadth at the end of the web stiffener, in mm, as shown in Fig 10
PAGE 19 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
SECTION 3 BUCKLING & ULTIMATE STRENGTH OF ORDINARY STIFFENERS AND STIFFENED PANELS
Symbols
For symbols not defined in this Section, refer to Ch 1, Sec 4. In this section, compressive and shear stresses are to be taken positive, tension stresses are to be taken negative. a : Length in mm of the longer side of the partial plate field in general or length in mm of the side of the partial plate field according Table 2, BLC 3 - 10 b : Length in mm of the shorter side of the partial plate field in general or length in mm of the side of the partial plate field according Table 2, BLC 3 - 10
=
n
a b
long. stiffener single field partial field
: Number of elementary plate panel breadths within the partial or total plate panel
bm
a y x
transverse stiffener
longitudinal : stiffener in the direction of the length a transverse : stiffener in the direction of the breath b
Figure 1:
PAGE 20 OF 40
b b
am
nb
CORRIGENDA 5
Table 3: Buckling and reduction factor for curved plate panel with R/t 2500 1
BucklingLoad Case 1a
b sx
Aspect ratio
b
Buckling factor K
R
Reduction factor
b R 1.63 R t
sx
K=
b Rt
+3
(R t )0.175
b 0.35
R t
1b
b with sx = R pe t pe R t
x =1 x = 1.274 0.686 x =
b R > 1.63 R t 0.65
K = 0.3
R2 + 2.25 bt R2 b2
1a
b sx
R t sx
b R 1.63 R t
K=
b Rt
+3
(R t )0.175
b 0.35
1b
b with p R sx = e t R pe t
x =1 x = 1.274 0.686 x =
0.65
b R > 1.63 R t
R2 K = 0.3 2 + 2.25 bt R b2
2
b sy R t sy
b R 0 .5 R t
K = 1+
2 b2 3 Rt
y =1
t R
for 0.25
3
b2 b 3 Rt R
y = 1.233 0.933
y = 0.3 /
b2 Rt
y = 0.2 / 2
3
b sx
0.6 b
Rt
2
Rt b
0.3
Rt b2
R t sx
R2 b K = 0.3 2 + 0.291 bt R
K = K
as in load case 1a
4
b t
3
0.5
b R 8.7 R t
= 1 = 1.274 0.686
0.65
b R > 8.7 R t
R Rt
PAGE 21 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
- - - - - plate edge free plate edge simply supported plate edge clamped
For curved plate fields with a very large radius the -value need not to be taken less than for the expanded plane field For curved single fields, e.g. bilge strake, which are located within plane partial or total fields, the reduction factor may taken as follow: 0.8 0.65 Load case 2: y = 2 1.0 Load case 1b: x = 2 1,0
PAGE 22 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
1.3 1.3.1
For primary supporting members for ships having a length L of 150 m or more, the direct strength analysis is to be carried out according to the provisions specified in Ch 7, and the requirements in [4] are also to be complied with. In addition, the primary supporting members for BC-A and BC-B ships are to comply with the requirements in [3] and [4].
2. 2.3
Scantling of primary supporting members for ships of less than 150m in length (L) Floors
t 2 = 1.75 3 t3 = 8.5S 2 k
H 2 a 2 a t1 C2
where :
PAGE 23 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
S d0
: Spacing of solid floors, in m : Depth of the solid floor at the point under consideration in m : Depth of the opening, if any, at the point under consideration in m : Distance between toes of hopper tanks at the position of the solid floor under consideration, in m : Coefficient obtained from Tab 5 depending on B DB / l DB . For intermediate values of B DB / l DB , C 2 is to be obtained by linear interpolation
d1
' B DB
C2
: Depth of the solid floor at the point under consideration, in m. However, where horizontal stiffeners are fitted on the floor, a is the distance from the horizontal stiffener under consideration to the bottom shell plating or the inner bottom plating or the distance between the horizontal stiffeners under consideration
S1 C2
: Value obtained from the following formulae: a) where openings with reinforcement or no opening are provided on solid floors: 1) where slots without reinforcement are provided:
H = 4.0 d2 1.0 , without being taken less than 1.0 S1
2) where slots with reinforcement are provided: H = 1.0 b) where openings without reinforcement are provided on solid floors: 1) where slots without reinforcement are provided:
H = 1 + 0.5 d0 d 4.0 2 1.0 , without being taken less than 1 + 0.5 S1 d0
d0
d2
: Depth of slots without reinforcement provided at the upper and lower parts of solid floors, in m, whichever is greater
S2
PAGE 24 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
Hot Spot Stress Simplified method for the bilge hopper knuckle part
Stress concentration factor K0
Plate net thickness in Angle of hopper slope plate to the horizontal (deg.) FE model 40 45 50 90 t (mm) 16 3.0 3.2 3.4 4.2 18 2.9 3.1 3.3 4.0 20 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.8 22 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.6 24 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.5 26 2.6 2.7 2.9 3.4 28 2.5 2.7 2.8 3.3 30 2.4 2.6 2.7 3.2 Note: Alternatively, K0 can be determined by the following formula. 0.14 (1.15 0.0033 ) K0 = (0.5t ) ( 0.2 + 0.0028 )
PAGE 25 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
where:
Q = 1000 u ( B H + bs ) 2.6 B H + 12 EI Q EAQ
DOC
L
i =1
H ,i B H ,i
MWT FS
: Maximum wave torsional moment, in kN.m, defined in Ch 4, Sec 3, [3.4.1], with fp = 0.5 : Stress correction factor, taken equal to:
FS = 5
FL
: Correction factor for longitudinal position of hatch corner, taken equal to:
FL = 1.75 FL = 1.0 x L
for 0.57 x / L 0.85 for x/L < 0.57 and x/L > 0.85
BH WQ IQ AQ
: Breadth of hatch opening, in m : Section modulus of the cross deck about z-axis, in m3, including upper stool, near hatch corner (see Fig 2) : Moment of inertia of the cross deck about z-axis, in m4, including upper stool, near the hatch corner (see Fig 2) : Effective shear area of the whole section of the cross deck, in m2, including upper stool, near the hatch corner (see Fig 2). For the determination of the effective shear area the consideration of only the plate elements is sufficient, and the stiffeners can be neglected.
bS
PAGE 26 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
IT
: Torsion moment of inertia of ships cross section, in m4, calculated within cross deck area by neglecting upper and lower stool of the bulkhead (see Fig 1). It may be calculated according to App 1 : Sector coordinate, in m2, calculated at the same cross section as IT and at the Y and Z location of the hatch corner (see Fig 1) It may be calculated according to App 1 : Length of cargo area, in m , being the distance between engine room bulkhead and collision bulkhead : Breadth of hatch opening of hatch i, in m : Length of hatch opening of hatch i, in m : Number of hatches.
LC BH,i LH,i n
K gh
r + 2rb = a 3ra
K gh
0.65 0.22lCD b , to be taken not less than 1.0 1 + 1.23l + 0.8b r CD a 0.65 r + 2rb 0.22lCD 2b , to be taken not less than 1.0 = a 1 + 1.23l + 1.6b r 3ra CD a
: Radius, in m, in minor axis (if the shape of corner is a circular arc, rb is to be equal to ra) : Length of cross deck, in m, in longitudinal direction : Distance, in m, from the edge of hatch opening to the ships side
PAGE 27 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
5. 5.4
5.4.1
The net thickness of girders in double bottom forward area, in mm, is not to be less than the greatest of either of the value t1 to t3 specified in the followings according to each location:
t1 = c A p SL Sl 2(d 0 d 1 ) a
3
t 2 = 1.75 C1a k
H 2 a 2 a t1 C
1
t3 =
where: cA : Coefficient taken equal to: cA = 3/A, with 0.3 c A 1.0 A : Loaded area, in m2, between the supports of the structure considered, obtained from the following formula: A=Sl pSL S : As defined in [3.4] : Spacing of centre or side girders under consideration, in m : Spacing Span of floors centre or side girders between floors under consideration, in m : Depth of the centre or side girder under consideration, in m : Depth of the opening, if any, at the point under consideration, in m : Value obtained from the following formulae:
PAGE 28 OF 40
l
d0 d1 H
CORRIGENDA 5
(a) (b)
Where the girder is provided with an unreinforced opening: H = 1 + 0.5 In other cases: H = 1.0
: Major diameter of the openings, in m : The greater of a or S1 , in m. : Depth of girders at the point under consideration, in m, Where, however, if horizontal stiffeners are fitted on the girder, a is the distance from the horizontal stiffener under consideration to the bottom shell plating or inner bottom plating, or the distance between the horizontal stiffeners under consideration
S1 C1 C1
5.4.2 Floors
The net thickness of floors in double bottom forward area, in mm, is not to be less than the greatest of either of the value t1 to t3 specified in the followings according to each location:
t1 = c A p SL Sl 2(d 0 d1 ) a H 2 a 2 a t1 C2
t 2 = 1.75 3 t3 = 8.5S 2 k
where : cA cA : As defined in [5.4.1] : Coefficient taken equal to: cA = 3/A, with 0.3 c A 1.0 A : Loaded area, in m2, between the supports of the structure considered, obtained from the following formula: A=Sl pSL
S
: As defined in [3.4] : Spacing of solid floors under consideration, in m : Spacing of girders Span of floors between centre girder and side girder or side girders under consideration, in m
l
d0
: Depth of the solid floor at the point under consideration in m : Depth of the opening, if any, at the point under consideration in m : Value obtained from the following formulae: c) Where openings with reinforcement or no opening are provided on solid floors:
d1 H
PAGE 29 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
4) Where slots with reinforcement are provided: H = 1.0 d) Where openings without reinforcement are provided on solid floors: 3) Where slots without reinforcement are provided:
H = 1 + 0.5 d0 d 4.0 2 1.0 , without being taken less than 1 + 0.5 S1 d0
d0
: Depth of slots without reinforcement provided at the upper and lower parts of solid floors, in m, whichever is greater
S1
: Spacing, in m, of vertical ordinary stiffeners or girders : Major diameter of the openings, in m. : Depth of the solid floor at the point under consideration, in m, Where, however, if horizontal stiffeners are fitted on the floor, a is the distance from the horizontal stiffener under consideration to the bottom shell plating or the inner bottom plating or the distance between the horizontal stiffeners under consideration
S2 C2
: The smaller of S1 or a , in m
: Coefficient given in Tab 7 depending on S1 / d 0 . For intermediate values of S1 / d 0 , C2 is to be
PAGE 30 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
The aft part lateral pressure in intact conditions, in kN/m2, is to be taken equal to (pS + pW).
4. SCANTLINGS
4.1 Side plating Plating
Reason for the Rule Clarification:
Editorial correction.
PAGE 31 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
Scantlings
Net scantlings
As specified in Ch 3, Sec 2 all scantlings referred to in this Section are net, i.e. they do not include any margin for corrosion. The gross scantlings are obtained as specified in Ch 3, Sec 3 Sec 2, 3.1[3.1].
PAGE 32 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
PAGE 33 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
where: QR : As defined in [2.1.2], [2.2.2] and [2.2.3] The related torsional stress, in N/mm2, is:
t =
68 kr
3.3
Analysis
For rudders supported by a sole piece the length l 20 is the distance between lower edge of rudder body and centre of sole piece, and I 20 is the moment of inertia of the pintle in the sole piece. Load on rudder body, in kN/m, (general):
pR = CR
l 10 10 3
PAGE 34 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
: Spring constant, in kN/m, of support in the sole piece or rudder horn respectively: for the support in the sole piece (see Fig 3):
Z=
6.18 I 50
l3 50
fb
: Unit displacement of rudder horn, in m/kN, due to a unit force of 1 kN acting in the centre of support
fb=
1.3 d 3 10 8 3E In
d3 In
f b = 0.21
In ft
: Moment of inertia of rudder horn, in cm4, around the x-axis at d/2 (see Fig 4) : Unit displacement due to a torsional moment of the amount 1, in m/kN
ft = d e2 G Jt d e2
ft =
/ ti
3.17 10 8 FT2
ft =
d e 2 ui / ti 3.14 10 8 FT2
for steel
Jt FT ui ti e, d
: Torsional moment of inertia, in m4 : Mean sectional area of rudder horn, in m2 : Breadth, in mm, of the individual plates forming the mean horn sectional area : Plate thickness of individual plate having breadth ui, in mm : Distances, in m, according to Fig 4
K11, K22, K12 : Rudder horn compliance constants calculated for rudder horn with 2-conjugate elastic supports (Fig 5).The 2-conjugate elastic supports are defined in terms of horizontal displacements, yi, by the following equations: at the lower rudder horn bearing: y1 = K12 FA2 K22 FA1 y2 = K11 FA2 K12 FA1 where y1, y2 : Horizontal displacements, in m, at the lower and upper rudder horn bearings, respectively
:Horizontal
support forces, in kN, at the lower and upper rudder horn bearings, respectively
3
3EJ 1h
e 2 GJ th
PAGE 35 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
: Height of the rudder horn, in m, defined in Fig 5. This value is measured downwards from the upper rudder horn end, at the point of curvature transition, till the mid-line of the lower rudder horn pintle
: Length, in m, as defined in Fig 5. This length is measured downwards from the upper rudder horn end, at the point of curvature transition, till the mid-line of the upper rudder horn bearing. For = 0, the above formulae converge to those of spring constant Z for a rudder horn with 1-elastic support, and assuming a hollow cross section for this part
e J1h
: Rudder-horn torsion lever, in m, as defined in Fig 5 (value taken at z = d/2) : Moment of inertia of rudder horn about the x axis, in m4, for the region above the upper rudder horn bearing. Note that J1h is an average value over the length (see Fig 5) : Moment of inertia of rudder horn about the x axis, in m4, for the region between the upper and lower rudder horn bearings. Note that J2h is an average value over the length d (see Fig 5) : Torsional stiffness factor of the rudder horn, in m4 For any thin wall closed section
J th =
J2h
Jth
4 FT2 ui ti i
FT ui ti
: Mean of areas enclosed by outer and inner boundaries of the thin walled section of rudder horn, in m2 : Length, in mm, of the individual plates forming the mean horn sectional area : Thickness, in mm, of the individual plates mentioned above.
Note that the Jth value is taken as an average value, valid over the rudder horn height.
B2 B3
B1
PAGE 36 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
3.4 3.4.4
Rudder trunk
The weld at the connection between the rudder trunk and the shell or the bottom of the skeg is to be full penetration. The fillet shoulder radius r, in mm, is to be as large as practicable and to comply with the following formulae: r = 60 r = 0.1D1 , without being less than 30, without being less than 30, where D1 is defined in [3.2.1]. The radius may be obtained by grinding. If disk grinding is carried out, score marks are to be avoided in the direction of the weld. The radius is to be checked with a template for accuracy. Four profiles at least are to be checked. A report is to be submitted to the Surveyor. when 40 / k N/mm2 when < 40 / k N/mm2
5. 5.1 5.1.3
For rudder bodies without cut-outs the permissible stress are limited to: bending stress, in N/mm2, due to MR defined in [3.3.3]:
b = 110
shear stress, in N/mm2, due to Q1 defined in [3.3.3]:
t = 50
equivalent stress, in N/mm2, due to bending and shear:
v =
2 + 3 2 = 120 b
v = b 2 + 3 2 = 120
In case of openings in the rudder plating for access to cone coupling or pintle nut the permissible stresses according to [5.1.4] apply. Smaller permissible stress values may be required if the corner radii are less than
0.15ho , where ho is the height of opening.
PAGE 37 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
5.2 5.2.1
Rudder plating
The thickness of the rudder plating, in mm, is to be determined according to the following formula:
t P = 1.74a p R k + 2.5
where:
p R = 10T + CR 10 3 A
t P = 1.74a p R k + 2.5
, in kN/m2
The influence of the aspect ratio of the plate panels may be taken into account according to Ch 3.
a = 1.1 0.5 b
b
max, 1.00, if
b 2.5 a
However, the thickness is to be not less than the thickness of the shell plating at aft part according to Ch 9, Sec 2. Regarding dimensions and welding, [10.1.1] is to be comply with.
10.
10.1.3
D
R 100 R 100
mm
mm
a 1 1 = b 3 5
a 1 1 = to b a3= 1 5 1 b 3 5
b
R
final machining after welding
R
final machining after welding
8 mm
30
30
2 mm
PAGE 38 OF 40
2 mm
8 mm
5m
5m
CORRIGENDA 5
F0 F1
Double continuous weld Double continuous weld Double continuous weld Double continuous weld
0.7t 0.5t + 1.0 0.4t + 2.0 0.3t + 4.0 0.4t + 1.0 0.3t + 2.0 0.2t + 4.0 0.3t + 1.0 0.2t + 2.0 0.1t + 4.0 0.5t + 1.0 0.4t + 2.0
F2
F3
F4
Intermittent weld
75
300
20 t 0.3t + 4.0 (1) t is as-built thickness of the thinner of two connected members (2) Leg length of fillet welds is made fine adjustments corresponding to the corrosion addition tC specified in Ch 3, Sec 3, Tab 1 as follows: + 1.0 mm for t C > 5 + 0.5 mm + 0.0 mm - 0.5 mm for 5 tC > 4 for 4 t C > 3 for
tC 3
(3) The weld sizes are to be rounded to the nearest half millimeter.
PAGE 39 OF 40
CORRIGENDA 5
It is a typo. As its application is limited to weld connection of the secondary member not importance structural members, the lowest double continuous category, e.g., F3, was originally intended in lieu of the intermittent weld. (Refer to KC ID 508)
PAGE 40 OF 40
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
Page 1 of 15
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice 3
where: equiv , j : Equivalent hot spot stress range, in N/mm2, in loading condition j obtained by [2.3.2]. Kf : Fatigue notch factor defined in Tab 1.
Table 1:
Fatigue notch factors Kf KfNot Grinding Without weld grinding 1.25 1.30 1.00 Grinding With weld grinding (not applicable for ordinary stiffeners and boxing fillet welding*1) 1.10 1.15 *2 -
Subject
Note: *1 Boxing fillet welding is defined as a fillet weld around a corner of a member as an extension of the principal weld. *2 This is applicable for deep penetration welding, or full penetration welding only. In case where grinding is performed, full details regarding grinding standards including the extent, smoothness particulars, final welding profiles, and grinding workmanship as well as quality acceptance criteria are to be submitted to the Society for approval. It is preferred that any grinding is carried out by rotary burrs, is to extend below plate surfaces in order to remove any toe defects and ground areas are to have sufficient corrosion protection. Such treatments are to procedure smooth concave profiles at weld toes with the depth of these depressions penetrating into plate surfaces to at least 0.5mm below the bottom of any visible undercuts. The depth of any grooves produced is to be kept to a minimum and, in general, kept to a maximum of 1mm. Under no circumstances is grinding depth to exceed 2mm or 7 % of plate gross thickness, whichever is smaller. Grinding has to extend to 0.5 longitudinal spacing or 0.5 frame spacing at the each side of hot spot locations.
Page 2 of 15
2.3.2 Equivalent hot spot stress range The equivalent hot spot stress range, in N/mm2, is to be calculated for each loading condition with the following formula:
equiv , j = f mean, j W ,
j
where: fmean , j : Correction factor for mean stress : for hatch corners fmean , j = 0.77 for primary members and longitudinal stiffeners connections, fmean , j corresponding to the condition j taken equal to:
f mean, j
m ,1
0.25
: Local hot spot mean stress, in N/mm2, in the condition 1, obtained from the following formulae: If 0.6 W ,1 2.5 ReH :
0.6 m ,1 = 0.18 W ,1
If 0.6 W ,1 < 2.5 ReH :
for for
: Local hot spot mean stress, in N/mm2, in the condition j, obtained from the following formulae:
0.24 W , j ReH :
m , j ( j 1) = 0.18 W , j
If
for for
0.24 W , j > ReH + m,1 mean,1 + mean, j 0.24 W , j ReH + m ,1 mean,1 + mean, j
mean , j : Structural hot spot mean stress, in N/mm2, corresponding to the condition j
: Residual stress, in N/mm2, taken equal to: obtained from the following formulae:
j = 1,2,3,4
res = 0.25ReH
Page 3 of 15
res = 0
for non welded part and primary members(cruciform joint or butt weld)
res , j
max ReH , min R eH , res 0 + mean, j + 0.6 W , j mean, j 0.6 W , j for mean, j 0 = min ReH , max R eH , res 0 + mean, j 0.24 W , j mean, j + 0.24 W , j for mean, j < 0
res 0 =
0.25 ReH 0
for
welded joint
Page 4 of 15
Technical Background for Rule Change Notice 3 (Ch 8 Sec 2, 2.3 Equivalent notch stress range)
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
Page 5 of 15
Technical Background for the Changes Regarding Equivalent notch stress range:
1. Reason for the Rule Change in Ch 8 Sec 2 2.3:
As specified in Appendix 1, almost all damages are occurred in ballast hold. The reasons that the majority of damage caused by cracks occurs in ballast holds are as follows. Structural members in ballast holds are subject to high internal pressure due to ballast water. However, since they are subject to relatively low external pressure, high tensile stresses (both the mean stress and stress range are large) are placed on those structural members susceptible to low fatigue life such as lower stool connections and bilge knuckle connections as shown in Fig. 3.1, while, the stresses placed on structural members in cargo holds that are other than ballast holds are relatively small or compressive even in cases where their value is large. Therefore, the majority of damage caused by cracks occurs in ballast holds. In the case of bilge knuckle connections in ballast holds under heavy ballast conditions, since the sum of the tensile mean stress and 0.6 times stress range are greater than ReH, the term res 0 does not affect any formula specified in CH 8 Sec 2 [2.3.2] of the current CSR (See the background for the treatment of residual stress specified in Appendix 2. This means that any fatigue assessment results for structural members such as those bilge knuckle connections in which damage occurs are not affected by the value of residual stress. On the other hand, with respect to those structural members in empty and loaded holds that are other than ballast holds, excessive compressive mean stresses or the mean stresses in four loading conditions are compressive or relatively low. Therefore, any fatigue assessments performed according to current rules give results which are far from our experience that less damage caused by cracks of primary members (bilge knuckles and lower stools) in empty and loaded holds other than ballast holds occur The reasons for obtaining such results are due to the assumptions that (1) the tensile residual stresses are generated after any excessive compressive loads are removed, and (2) the existence of initial weld residual stresses of 0.25 ReH. In some cases, the weld residual stress is released due to certain reasons for the primary members. The factors which are the cause of stress release are (i) assembly process (ii) tank test (iii) internal and external loads etc. And we obtained the remark that the weld residual stress is released even if the large compressive load is applied Based on the above knowledge, the calculation formula of the equivalent hot spot stress range is corrected to make weld residual stress zero except the case for ordinary stiffener. Moreover, it is also known that when excessive compression loads are imposed on the welded structure and then removed, it does not lead to production of tensional residual stress. This knowledge has been reflected in the formula. However, the assumption of initial weld residual stress is kept for longitudinal stiffeners, because longitudinal stiffeners penetrate transverse webs at so many locations that the estimation should be left on the safer side. Furthermore, the stress concentration at the hot spots subjected to fatigue strength assessment can be mitigated by grinding as can the stress concentration in primary members. As the CSR for tankers reflects this information, the effects of stress mitigation by grinding have been included in the assessment of primary members except the connection of side frames which the boxing fillet welds are adopted, considering the actual and practical construction procedure.
res = 0.25ReH
(2) As the effects of weld residual stress do not need to be considered for primary members, the assumption of the initial weld residual stress is to be added in a similar way to the current assumption for non welded parts in which the residual stress does not exist. res = 0 , (for non welded part and primary members (cruciform and butt weld)
2.2 Consideration of the effects of grinding In the calculation of hot spot stress, the coefficient for the grinding effect is to be defined with reference to the International Institute of Welding (IIW) Recommendation of IIW Fatigue design welded joint and component and added to Ch8 Sec2 Table1. According to the post welds improvements specified in IIW Recommendations on Post Weld Improvements of Steel and Aluminum Structures, XIII-1965-00, 2004, grinder finishing for the purpose of removing any undercut and /or smoothing any welding beads is recommended to be carried out. The recommended practice for grinder finishing is to the plate surface to a depth of at least 0.5mm from the bottom of the visible undercut but not to exceed 1.0mm. According to the results of experiments specified in several technical papers, the grinder effect on fatigue life is estimated to have a value of 1.3. If a value of 1.0 is used for those surfaces that are not subjected to grinder finishing then this is an improvement. According to IIW Recommendations for Fatigue Design of Welded Joints and Components, 2004, IIW Document XIII-1965-03/XV-1127-03 the grinder effect value is to be taken as 1.25 in order to be on the safe side. For example, (extract of IIW Rec.) No. 511
Two-sided fillets, toe ground: 100MPa Fillet weld(s) as welded : 80MPa (100/80=1.25) The recommended value is based on the results of experiments that used specimens in well controlled conditions. Considering that any actual grinding work on structures is not so well controlled, we feel that, to be even more on the safe side, the grinder effect value should be even further lowered to 1.15 as proposed in Rule Change Notice 3. Table 1 Fatigue notch factors Kf
Subject Grinding KfNot Grinding With weld grinding Without weld grinding (not applicable and boxing fillet welding*1) 1.25 1.10 1.30 1.15*2 1.00 -
Note: *1 Boxing fillet welding is defined as a fillet weld around a corner of a member as an extension of the principal weld. *2 This is applicable for deep penetration welding, or full penetration welding only.
However, to avoid any risk of root cracking, the application of this technique is limited to deep penetration welding or full penetration welding. Furthermore, in order to ensure the effects of the grinding, procedures specified by the International Institute of Welding have been added to the Rules.
To see the effects of the change to the calculation formulae of the equivalent hot spot stress range for primary members, the fatigue strength assessment of the connections of the inner bottom plate with the bilge hopper sloping plate and the lower stool side plate was carried out. For reference, all the lower stool side plates have slanted configuration. Table 3.1 Considerable ships and cargo holds Type of ship Type of cargo holds Cape (DSS) 170K Ballast hold Empty hold Loaded hold Cape (SSS) 180K Ballast hold Loaded hold Panamax (SSS) 82K Ballast hold Empty hold Panamax (SSS) 110K Ballast hold Loaded hold Handymax (SSS) 57K Ballast hold Empty hold
A B C D E
The equivalent hot spot stress range and mean stress obtained by FEA are shown in Figure 3.1 The following cumulative fatigue damage was calculated from the above equivalent hot spot stress range and mean stress. (1) The cumulative fatigue damage according to the current CSR (2)(a) The cumulative fatigue damage according to the corrected formulae in 2.1 (mod_1 in Figure 3.2) (b) The cumulative fatigue damage according to the corrected formulae in 2.1 with the effect of grinding in 2.2 (mod_1(G) in Figure 3.2) The results of the cumulative fatigue damage are shown in Figure 3.2. From the results in Figure 3.2, the following can be said about the corrected formulae in 2.1. (1) There is no effect on the cumulative fatigue damage at the fatigue assessment points in ballast holds where there was high tensional mean stress. (2) In cargo holds other than ballast holds, the cumulative fatigue damage at the fatigue assessment points was less than that of the current CSR, when there was compressive or low tensional mean stress and the hot spot stress range was large. (3) The relative tendency of the cumulative fatigue damage at the fatigue assessment points in ballast holds and other holds was consistent with the damage record specified in the Appendix. (4) The cumulative fatigue damage with grinding was about 60% of that without grinding.
4. Impact on scantlings Since the results of the fatigue strength assessment depend on various countermeasures such as grinding, additional reinforcement, inset plate or local thickness increase, and other fabrication improvements, the scantling impact due to this change cannot be estimated directly. However, the correction of the calculation formulae mitigates the excessive result on fatigue damage in cargo holds other than ballast holds, where less fatigue cracks have been found in the damage record.
Page 8 of 15
Fig. 3.1 Hot spot stress range and hot spot mean stress
A (DSS Cape)
1065 Stress (N/mm2) 710 355 0 -355 -710
Heavy Homo Normal Alt Heavy Homo Alt Normal Heavy Homo Alt Normal Alt Homo Heavy Normal Heavy Homo Alt Normal Alt Homo Normal Heavy Homo Normal Heavy Alt Homo Heavy Alt Normal Homo Heavy Alt Normal Bilge (Ballast) Lstool_Aft (Ballast) Lstool_Fore (Ballast) Bilge (Loaded) Lstool_Aft (Loaded) Lstool_Fore (Loaded) Bilge (Empty) Lstool_Aft (Empty) Lstool_Fore (Empty)
-1065
B (SSS Cape)
1065 Stress (N/mm2) 710 355 0 -355 -710
Alt Alt Alt Alt Alt Homo Homo Homo Homo Homo Heavy Heavy Heavy Heavy Heavy Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Heavy Homo Alt
-1065
Bilge (Ballast)
Lstool_Aft (Ballast)
Lstool_Fore (Ballast)
Bilge (Loaded)
Lstool_Aft (Loaded)
Lstool_Fore (Loaded)
Fig. 3.1 Hot spot stress range and hot spot mean stress (continued)
C (SSS Panamax)
1065 Stress (N/mm2) 710 355 0 -355 -710
Alt Alt Alt Alt Alt Alt Homo Homo Homo Homo Homo Homo Normal Normal Normal Normal Homo Alt
-1065
Heavy
Normal
Normal
Normal
Heavy
Heavy
Heavy
Heavy
Bilge (Ballast)
Heavy
Lstool_Fore (Ballast)
Lstool_Aft (Ballast)
Bilge (Ballast)
Bilge (Empty)
Lstool_Aft (Empty)
Lstool_Fore (Empty)
Page 9 of 15
Heavy
Normal
D (SSS Panamax)
1065 Stress (N/mm2) 710 355 0 -355 -710
Alt Alt Alt Alt Heavy Heavy Heavy Alt Alt Heavy Normal Normal Normal Heavy Normal Normal Normal Heavy Homo Homo Homo Homo Homo Homo
-1065
Bilge (Ballast)
Lstool_Aft (Ballast)
Lstool_Fore (Ballast)
Bilge (Loaded)
Lstool_Aft (Loaded)
Lstool_Fore (Loaded)
E (SSS Handymax)
1065 Stress (N/mm2) 710 355 0 -355 -710
Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Homo Homo Homo Homo Homo Homo Alt Alt Alt Heavy Heavy Alt Heavy Heavy Heavy Heavy Alt Alt
-1065
Bilge (Ballast)
Lstool_Aft (Ballast)
Lstool_Fore (Ballast)
Bilge (Empty)
Lstool_Aft (Empty)
Lstool_Fore (Empty)
*"Lstool_Aft" and "Lstool_Fore" mean the lower stool of the aft end and fore end of the cargo hold.
Page 10 of 15
A (DSS Cape)
2 Cumulative fatigue damage 1.5 1 0.5 0
Bilge (Ballast) Lstool_Aft Lstool_Fore (Ballast) (Ballast) Bilge (Loaded) Lstool_Aft Lstool_Fore (Loaded) (Loaded) Bilge (Empty) Lstool_Aft Lstool_Fore (Empty) (Empty)
B (SSS Cape)
3 Cumulative fatigue damage 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0
Bilge (Ballast) Lstool_Aft (Ballast) Lstool_Fore (Ballast) Bilge (Loaded) Lstool_Aft (Loaded) Lstool_Fore (Loaded)
C (SSS Panamax)
4 Cumulative fatigue damage 3.5 3 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0
Bilge (Ballast) Lstool_Fore (Ballast) Lstool_Aft (Ballast) Bilge (Ballast) Bilge (Empty) Lstool_Aft (Empty) Lstool_Fore (Empty)
Page 11 of 15
D (SSS Panamax)
5 4.5 4 3.5 3 2.5 2 1.5 1 0.5 0 Cumulative fatigue damage
CSR-B mod_1 mod_1(G)
Bilge (Ballast)
Lstool_Aft (Ballast)
Lstool_Fore (Ballast)
Bilge (Loaded)
Lstool_Aft (Loaded)
Lstool_Fore (Loaded)
E (SSS Handymax)
2 Cumulative fatigue damage 1.5 1 0.5 0
Bilge (Ballast) Lstool_Aft (Ballast) Lstool_Fore (Ballast) Bilge (Empty) Lstool_Aft (Empty) Lstool_Fore (Empty)
*"Lstool_Aft" and "Lstool_Fore" mean the lower stool of the aft end and fore end of the cargo hold.
Page 12 of 15
IB/slant of LS IB/sloping of BH IS/sloping of BH TB/LS TB/US HF/BH HF/TST Total Note * The number of cases of damage per cargo hold is the quotients of number of cargo damage divided by number of cargo holds. As given in Table A1, the damage to members in ballast hold is 99.8% of the total number of the case of damage for primary members and the damage to holds other than ballast hold is 0.2%. About 72% of damage occurred at the connection between inner bottom plating and the sloping plate of the hopper tank and between inner bottom plating and the sloping and/or the vertical plate of the lower stool.
Page 13 of 15
Appendix 2 Technical Background for the treatment of mean stress and residual stress
1. It is well and widely known that any initial residual stresses (res), which are tensile and have magnitudes that are normally close to the yield stresses of materials, exist in welded joints (hot spots) or their periphery thereof. In cases where loads are imposed onto hot spots and stresses at such hot spots reach locally yield stresses, any initial residual stresses are relaxed after the removal of such loads. This phenomenon is called the shake-down effect. This shake-down effect occurs in those perfectly elasto plastic models introduced in the Rules. Furthermore, it is also known that static mean stresses (structural mean stresses) influence the fatigue strengths. The effect of any mean stresses influencing the fatigue strengths can be evaluated by the sum of any residual stresses and structural mean stresses. Since the S-N curves with slopes equal to 3, as given by UK-HSE standards, express fatigue strengths of welded structures in those cases where residual welds close to the yield stresses of materials exists, it cannot be used to evaluate the effects of mean stresses. 2. The relaxation of any initial residual stresses at hot spots can be evaluated by using shake-down models based on the assumptions of perfectly elasto plastic models. Those loads to be considered are hydrostatic loads (structural mean stresses) and hydrodynamic loads induced by waves. Since those stress ranges due to hydrodynamic loads induced by waves are random variables in which wave heights are subject to the Gaussian process, any stresses contributing to shake-down effects depend on the periods of duration in navigating under specific loading conditions. Assuming that ships are imposed upon by significant hydrodynamic pressure only in cases where such ships are at sea, these periods of duration for one loading condition can be set to about 10 days (105 cycles). In this case, the magnitude of any stress ranges S dominating mean stress conditions during this period can be expressed by 0.96 5 (Ref. SNAJ 190, November 2001), where 5 is defined as the maximum stress range corresponding to these 105 cycles loads. In those fatigue strength assessment procedures specified in the Rules, reference stresses correspond to 104 cycle loads. In cases where 5 is defined as the maximum stress range corresponding to 105 cycles loads, the relationship between 5 and 4 is: 5 = 1.25 4 Then, we can get the following relationship S = 0.96 5 = 1.2 4 The model regarding initial residual stresses res , mean stresses mean and S can be illustrated as given in Fig. A1 and max is used, in order to evaluate any shake-down effects. From the relationship illustrated by the above figure, we can get the following equation: max = res + mean + 0.5 S = res + mean + 0.6 4 3. As specified above, shake-down effects are to be considered in cases where the max exceeds the yield stress of material (ReH). In such cases, any considered mean stresses can be expressed by the following equation: m = ReH 0.6 4 In those cases where 0.5 S + res + mean is less than ReH: m = mean + res
Page 14 of 15
The above cases are applicable to Condition 1 which is defined the condition in which maximum stress is the largest on the tension side among the loading conditions homogeneous, alternate normal ballast and heavy ballast According to experience as well as some studies regarding fatigue damages of side longitudinals in single hull tankers, initial weld residual stresses for welded joints such as longitudinals are conservatively given the value of 0.25 ReH.
mean res
0
0.6 4 S = 1.2 4
max
Fig. A1 Illustration of the relationship of res , mean and S 4. However, in the cases of fatigue strengths of any of the welded joints of primary members, initial residual stress values of 0.25 ReH are too conservative considering the tendency of fatigue damage, especially, in those cases where mean stresses of all loading conditions are compressions. In the case of weld joints of primary members, any residual stresses after removal of applied loads can be still evaluated by the following equation in order to consider shake-down effects. res ' = m1 mean1 Where, m1 : the mean stress of the Condition 1 considered the shake-down effect mean1 : the structural mean stress in the Condition 1. However, in cases where mean1 is a compression, res ' should be taken to equal 0 considering the damage tendencies of the welded joints of primary members. 5. In conclusion, the treatment of residual stresses of primary members is to be changed as specified by this Rule Change Notice 3.
Page 15 of 15
Notes: (1) These Rule Changes enter into force on 1 July 2009.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 1 OF 171
Table of Contents
Rule Change Notice No.1-1 (Hull Girder Strength) ...3 Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-1(Hull Girder Strength)19 Rule Change Notice No.1-2 (Hatch Covers) ....31 Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-2 (Hatch Covers) .....35 Rule Change Notice No.1-3 (Steel Coil) ..41 Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-3 (Steel Coil) ...51 Rule Change Notice No.1-4 (Minimum Scantling, Side Frame and Grab) ..71 Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-4 (Minimum Scantling, Side Frame and Grab) ....79 Rule Change Notice No.1-5 (Direct Strength Analysis) ...83 Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-5 (Direct Strength Analysis) ....89 Rule Change Notice No.1-6 (Fatigue Check for Longitudinals) ......97 Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-6 (Fatigue Check for Longitudinals) ......119 Rule Change Notice No.1-7 (Corrosion Additions) ....133 Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-7 (Corrosion Additions) .....139 Rule Change Notice No.1-8 (Corrugated Bulkhead) ......143 Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-8 (Corrugated Bulkhead) .......163 Rule Change Notice No.1-9 (Main Engine Foundation) ....167 Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-9 (Main Engine Foundation) 169
PAGE 2 OF 171
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 3 OF 171
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-1.
1 = (QSW + QWV QC )
where: t
S IY t
: Minimum net thickness, in mm, of side and inner side plating, as applicable according to Tab 1 : Shear distribution coefficient defined in Tab 1
= sgn (QSW )
QC
: Shear force correction (see Fig 2) at the section considered. The shear force correction is to be considered independently forward and aft of the transverse bulkhead for the hold considered. , which The shear force correction takes into account, when applicable, the portion of loads transmitted by the double bottom girders to the transverse bulkheads: for ships with any non-homogeneous loading conditions, such as alternate hold loading conditions and heavy ballast conditions carrying ballast in hold(s):
QC =
QC = 0
= 1.38 + 1.55
=g
l 0 b0 l 2 + 0 b0
PAGE 4 OF 171
l0 , b0 : Length and breadth, respectively, in m, of the flat portion of the double bottom in way of the hold
considered; b0 is to be measured on the hull transverse section at the middle of the hold
lH
BH M
: Length, in m, of the hold considered, measured between the middle of the transverse corrugated bulkheads depth : Ships breadth, in m, measured at the level of inner bottom on the hull transverse section at the middle of the hold considered : Total mass of cargo, in t, in the hold of the section considered Mass, in t, in the considered section. Adjacent cargo hold is loaded in a non homogeneous loading condition for the condition under consideration M is to include the total mass in the hold and the mass of water ballast in double bottom tank, bounded by side girders in way of hopper tank plating or longitudinal bulkhead. Other cases M is the total mass in the hold.
TLC TLC,mh : Draught, in m, measured vertically on the hull transverse section at the middle of the hold considered, from the moulded baseline to the waterline in the loading condition considered.
Bulkhead
Bulkhead
QC QC _ F
Full hold
Empty hold
QC _ E QC=TLC
Bulkhead
QC _ F : shear force correction for the full hold QC _ E : shear force correction for the empty hold
Figure 2: Shear force correction QC
PAGE 5 OF 171
Table 1: Shear stresses induced by vertical shear forces Ship typology Single side ship Double side ship Location Sides Sides Inner sides t, in mm tS tS tIS
0,5
0.5(1 )
0.5
where: tS, tIS : Minimum net thicknesses, in mm, of side and inner side, respectively tSM, tISM : Mean net thicknesses, in mm, over all the strakes of side and inner side , respectively. They are calculated as (li ti) / li, where li and ti are the length, in m, and the net thickness, in mm, of the ith strake of side and inner side.
t ISM t SM
2.2.3 Shear stresses in flooded conditions of BC-A or BC-B ships This requirement applies to BC-A or BC-B ships, in addition to [2.2.1] and [2.2.2]. The shear stresses, in the flooded conditions specified in Ch 4, Sec 3, are to be obtained at the calculation any point, in N/mm2, from the following formula:
1 = (QSW , F + QWV , F QC )
S Y t
= sgn (Q SW ,F )
QC
: Shear force correction, to be calculated according to [2.2.2],where the mass M is to include the mass
of the ingressed water in the hold considered is to be added to M and where the draught TLC TLC,mh is to be measured up to the equilibrium waterline.
Where the shear stresses are obtained through the simplified procedure in [2.2.2], the permissible positive or negative still water shear force in intact condition at any hull transverse section is obtained, in kN, from the following formula:
120 Y t QP = + QC QWV k S
where:
= sgn (QSW )
PAGE 6 OF 171
: Minimum net thickness, in mm, of side and inner side plating, as applicable according to Tab 1 : Shear force corrections defined in [2.2.2], to be considered independently forward and aft of the transverse bulkhead.
QC
A lower value of the permissible still water shear force may be considered, if requested by the Shipbuilder.
PAGE 7 OF 171
Symbols
For symbols not defined in this Appendix, refer to Ch 1, Sec 4. IY : Moment of inertia, in m4, of the hull transverse section around its horizontal neutral axis, to be calculated according to Ch 5, Sec 1, [1.5.1] ZAB, ZAD : Section moduli, in m3, at bottom and deck, respectively, defined in Ch 5, Sec 1, [1.4.2]. ReHs ReHp As Ap : Minimum yield stress, in N/mm2, of the material of the considered stiffener. : Minimum yield stress, in N/mm2, of the material of the considered plate. : Net sectional area, in cm2, of stiffener, without attached plating : Net sectional area, in cm2, of attached plating
Fig 1. In this approach, the ultimate hull girder bending moment capacity MU is defined as the peak value of the curve with vertical bending moment M versus the curvature of the ship cross section as shown in Fig 1. The curve is to be obtained through an incremental-iterative approach. Each step of the incremental procedure is represented by the calculation of the bending moment Mi which acts on the hull transverse section as the effect of an imposed curvature i. For each step, the value i is to be obtained by summing an increment of curvature to the value relevant to the previous step i-1.This increment of curvature corresponds to an increment of the rotation angle of the hull girder transverse section around its horizontal neutral axis. This rotation increment induces axial strains in each hull structural element, whose value depends on the position of the element. In hogging condition, the structural elements above the neutral axis are lengthened, while the elements below the neutral axis are shortened. Vice-versa in sagging condition. The stress induced in each structural element by the strain is to be obtained from the load-end shortening curve - of the element, which takes into account the behaviour of the element in the non-linear elasto-plastic domain. The distribution of the stresses induced in all the elements composing the hull transverse section determines, for each step, a variation of the neutral axis position, since the relationship - is non-linear. The new position of the neutral axis relevant to the step considered is to be obtained by means of an iterative process, imposing the equilibrium among the stresses acting in all the hull elements.
PAGE 8 OF 171
Once the position of the neutral axis is known and the relevant stress distribution in the section structural elements is obtained, the bending moment of the section Mi around the new position of the neutral axis, which corresponds to the curvature i imposed in the step considered, is to be obtained by summing the contribution given by each element stress. The main steps of the incremental-iterative approach described above are summarised as follows (see also Fig 1):
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
Divide the transverse section of hull into stiffened plate elements. Define stress-strain relationships for all elements as shown in Tab 1 Initialize curvature 1 and neutral axis for the first incremental step with the value of incremental curvature (curvature that induces a stress equal to 1% of yield strength in strength deck) as:
ReH E 1 = = zD N 0.01
where: zD : Z co-ordinate, in m, of strength deck at side, with respect to reference co-ordinate defined in Ch 1, Sec 4, [4]
Step 4
Calculate for each element the corresponding strain i = zi i = (zi-zNA) and the corresponding stress
i
Step 5
Determine the neutral axis zNA_cur at each incremental step by establishing force equilibrium over the whole transverse section as: Ai i = Aj j (i-th element is under compression, j-th element under tension)
Step 6
Calculate the corresponding moment by summing the contributions of all elements as:
MU =
Ui Ai
(zi z NA _ cur )
Step 7
Compare the moment in the current incremental step with the moment in the previous incremental step. If the slope in M- relationship is less than a negative fixed value, terminate the process and define the peak value of MU. Otherwise, increase the curvature by the amount of and go to Step 4.
Hull girder transverse sections are to be considered as being constituted by the members contributing to the hull girder ultimate strength. Sniped stiffeners are also to be modeled imaginarily, taking account that they doesnt contribute to the hull girder strength. The structural members are categorized into an ordinary stiffener element, a stiffened plate element or a hard corner element. The plate panel including web plate of girder or side stringer is idealized into either a stiffened plate element, an attached plate of an ordinary stiffener element or a hard corner element. The plate panel is categorized into the following two kinds: - longitudinally stiffened panel of which the longer side is in the longitudinal direction, and - transversely stiffened panel of which the longer side is in the perpendicular direction to the longitudinal direction.
PAGE 9 OF 171
Hard corner element Hard corner elements are sturdier elements composing the hull girder transverse section, which collapse mainly according to an elasto-plastic mode of failure (material yielding); they are generally constituted by two plates not lying in the same plane. The extent of a hard corner element from the point of intersection of the plates is taken equal to 20tp on transversely stiffened panel and to 0.5s on a longitudinally stiffened panel. (See Fig 6) where: tp : Gross offered thickness of the plate, in mm s : Spacing of the adjacent longitudinal stiffener, in m
Bilge, sheer strake-deck stringer elements, girder-deck connections and face plate-web connections on large girders are typical hard corners. Ordinary stiffener element The ordinary stiffener constitutes an ordinary stiffener element together with the attached plate. The attached plate width is in principle: - equal to the mean spacing of the ordinary stiffener when the panels on both sides of the stiffener are longitudinally stiffened, or - equal to the width of the longitudinally stiffened panel when the panel on one side of the stiffener is longitudinally stiffened and the other panel is of the transversely stiffened. (See Fig 6) Stiffened plate element The plate between ordinary stiffener elements, between an ordinary stiffener element and a hard corner element or between hard corner elements is to be treated as a stiffened plate element. (See Fig 6)
s2-(s1+s3)/2
s4/2
s1
s2
s3
s3
s4
The typical examples of modeling of hull girder section are illustrated in Figs 7 and 8. Notwithstanding the foregoing principle these figures are to be applied to the modeling in the vicinity of upper deck, sheer strake and hatch side girder.
PAGE 10 OF 171
s4/2
s6/2 s1/2 s1/2 s2/2 s2/2 s3/2 s3/2 s7/2 s6/2 s7/2
2 s 8/
s4
s4/2
2 s 8/
s8
Figure 7: Extension of the breadth of the attached plating and hard corner element
Figure 8: Examples of the configuration of stiffened plate elements, ordinary stiffener elements and hard corner elements on a hull section
PAGE 11 OF 171
s7
s6
(1) In case of the knuckle point as shown in Fig 9, the plating area adjacent to knuckles in the plating with an
angle greater than 30 degrees is defined as a hard corner. The extent of one side of the corner is taken equal to 20tp on transversely framed panels and to 0.5s on longitudinally framed panels from the knuckle point.
Knuckle point
Figure 9: The case of plating with knuckle point
(2) Where the plate members are stiffened by non-continuous longitudinal stiffeners, the non-continuous stiffeners are considered only as dividing a plate into various elementary plate panels. (3) Where the opening is provided in the stiffened plate element, the openings are to be considered in accordance with Ch 5 Sec 1, [1.2.7], [1.2.8] and [1.2.9]. (4) Where attached plating is made of steels having different thicknesses and/or yield stresses, an average thickness and/or average yield stress obtained by the following formula are to be used for the calculation.
t=
t1s1 + t 2 s2 , s
Where,
ReHp =
ReH1, ReH2, t1, t2, s1, s2 and s are shown in Fig 10.
s s1 t1 ReHp1 s2 t2 ReHp2
Stiffened plate element Plating panels and ordinary stiffener, element composing the hull girder transverse sections may collapse following one of the modes of failure specified in Tab 1.
PAGE 12 OF 171
Where the plate members are stiffened by non-continuous longitudinal stiffeners, the stress of the element is to be obtained in accordance with [2.2.3] to [2.2.7], taking into account the non-continuous longitudinal stiffener. In calculating the total forces for checking the hull girder ultimate strength, the area of non-continuous longitudinal stiffener is to be assumed as zero.
Where the opening is provided in the stiffened plate element, the considered area of the stiffened plate element is to be obtained by deducting the opening area from the plating in calculating the total forces for checking the hull girder ultimate strength. The consideration of the opening is in accordance with the requirement in Ch 5 Sec 1, [1.2.7] to [1.2.9].
For stiffened plate element, the effective breadth of plate for the load shortening portion of the stress-strain curve is to be taken as full plate breadth, i.e. to the intersection of other plate or longitudinal stiffener not from the end of the hard corner element nor from the attached plating of ordinary stiffener element, if any. In calculating the total forces for checking the hull girder ultimate strength, the area of the stiffened plate element is to be taken between the hard corner element and the ordinary stiffener element or between the hard corner elements, as applicable.
Table 1:
Modes of failure of stiffened plate element plating panel and ordinary stiffeners element Element Mode of failure Curve defined in
Lengthened stiffened plate element Elasto-plastic collapse transversely framed plating panel or ordinary stiffeners element Shortened ordinary stiffeners element Beam column buckling Torsional buckling Web local buckling of flanged profiles Web local buckling of flat bars Shortened stiffened plate transversely framed plating panel element Plate buckling
[2.2.3]
Hard corners are sturdier elements composing the hull girder transverse section, which collapse mainly according to an elasto-plastic mode of failure (material yielding). These elements are generally constituted of two plates not lying in the same plane. Bilge, sheer strake-deck stringer elements, girder-deck connections and face plate-web connections on large girders are typical hard corners. The relevant load-end shortening curve - is to be obtained for lengthened and shortened hard corners according to [2.2.3].
PAGE 13 OF 171
The equation describing the load-end shortening curve - for the elasto-plastic collapse of structural elements composing the hull girder transverse section is to be obtained from the following formula, valid for both positive (shortening) and negative (lengthening) strains (see Fig 2):
= ReH
where: ReHA
= ReHA
: Equivalent minimum yield stress, in N/mm2, of the considered element, obtained by the following formula
ReHA =
ReHp Ap + ReHs As Ap + As
for < 1 for 1 1 for > 1
E Y
E Y
Y =
ReH E
Y =
ReHA E
ReHA
-ReHA
Figure 2: Load-end curve - for elasto plastic collapse 2.2.4 Beam column buckling
The equation describing the load-end shortening curve CR1- for the beam column buckling of ordinary stiffeners composing the hull girder transverse section is to be obtained from the following formula (see Fig 3):
CR1 = C1
AStif + 10bE t p AStif + 10 st p
AS + ApE AS + Ap
CR1 = C1
where:
PAGE 14 OF 171
AStif
: Edge function defined in [2.2.3] : Net sectional area of the stiffener, in cm2, without attached plating : Critical stress, in N/mm2, equal to:
C1
C1 =
E1
for
E1 E1 > E1 >
E1
ReHB 2
C1 = ReH 1
ReH 4 E1
for
C1 = ReHB 1
ReHB
ReHB 4 E1
for
: Equivalent minimum yield stress, in N/mm2, of the considered element, obtained by the following formula
ReHB =
ApE1
ApE1 = 10bE1t p
lpE lsE : Distance, in mm, measured from the neutral axis of the stiffener with attached plate of width bE1 to the bottom of the attached plate : Distance, in mm, measured from the neutral axis of the stiffener with attached plate of width bE1 to the top of the stiffener
E1
: Relative strain defined in [2.2.3] : Euler column buckling stress, in N/mm2, equal to:
E1 = 2 E
IE bE1
IE AE l 2
10 4
: Net moment of inertia of ordinary stiffeners, in cm4, with attached shell plating of width bE1 : Effective width, in m, of the attached shell plating, equal to:
b E1 = s
bE1 = s
E = 10 3
s tp
ReH
E
E = 103
s tp
ReHp
E
AE ApE : Net sectional area, in cm2, of ordinary stiffeners with attached shell plating of width bE, equal to:
ApE = 10bE t p
PAGE 15 OF 171
Figure 3: Load-end shortening curve CR1- for beam column buckling 2.2.5 Torsional buckling The equation describing the load-end shortening curve CR2- for the flexural-torsional buckling of ordinary
stiffeners composing the hull girder transverse section is to be obtained according to the following formula (see Fig 4).
CR 2 =
where:
CR 2 =
As C 2 + Ap CP As + Ap
C2
C2 =
E2
for
E2
ReH 2
ReH 2
E2
ReHs 2
C 2 = ReH 1
ReH 4 E 2
ReHs 4 E 2
for E 2 >
C 2 = ReHs 1
E2 CP
for
E2 >
ReHs 2
: Euler torsional buckling stress, in N/mm2, defined in Ch 6, Sec 3, [4.3] : Relative strain defined in [2.2.3] : Buckling stress of the attached plating, in N/mm2, equal to:
2.25 1.25 2 ReH CP = E E
CP = 2 ReHp E E
2.25 1.25
CP = ReH
CP = ReHp
PAGE 16 OF 171
Figure 4: Load-end shortening curve CR2- for flexural-torsional buckling 2.2.6 Web local buckling of ordinary stiffeners made of flanged profiles
The equation describing the load-end shortening curve CR3- for the web local buckling of flanged ordinary stiffeners composing the hull girder transverse section is to be obtained from the following formula:
CR 3 = ReH
where
10 3 bE t p + hwe t w + b f t f 10 3 st p + hw t w + b f t f
CR 3 =
bE hwe
: Edge function defined in [2.2.3] : Effective width, in m, of the attached shell plating, defined in [2.2.4] : Effective height, in mm, of the web, equal to:
2.25 1.25 hwe = 2 hw w w hwe = hw
w =
hw tw
ReH
E
w =
hw ReHs tw E
The equation describing the load-end shortening curve CR4- for the web local buckling of flat bar ordinary stiffeners composing the hull girder transverse section is to be obtained from the following formula (see Fig 5):
CR 4 =
where:
10 st P CP + AStiff C 4
AStiff + 10st P
CR 4 =
Ap CP + As C 4 Ap + As
CP C4
: Edge function defined in [2.2.3] : Buckling stress of the attached plating, in N/mm2, defined in [2.2.5] : Critical stress, in N/mm2, equal to:
C4 =
E4
for E 4
ReH 2
E4
ReHs 2
PAGE 17 OF 171
C 4 = ReH 1
ReH 4 E 4 ReHs 4 E 4
for E 4 >
ReH 2
C 4 = ReHs 1
E4
for
E4 >
ReHs 2
E 4 = 160000
tw hw
Figure 5: Load-end shortening curve CR4- for web local buckling 2.2.8 Plate buckling The equation describing the load-end shortening curve CR5- for the buckling of transversely stiffened panels
composing the hull girder transverse section is to be obtained from the following formula:
CR 5
ReH 2 s 2.25 1.25 = min 1 s ReH l 2 + 0.11 l 1 + 2 E E E ReHp 2 s 2.25 1.25 = min 1 s ReHp l 2 + 0.11 l 1 + 2 E E E
: Edge function defined in [2.2.3].
CR 5
where:
E = 103
s
s tp
ReH
E
E = 103
s tp
ReHp
E
: plate breadth, in m, taken as the spacing between the ordinary stiffeners : longer side of the plate, in m.
PAGE 18 OF 171
Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-1 (Hull Girder Strength)
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 19 OF 171
PAGE 20 OF 171
2.2 Chapter 5, Appendix 1, [2.1.1], [2.1.3], [2.2.1] to [2.2.8] 2.2.1 Chapter 5, Appendix 1, Symbols and [2.1.1] (1) Definitions of necessary symbols are added in order to evaluate stiffened panels in cases where any attached plating and stiffeners are made of steel having different stresses. (2) Editorial correction in [2.1.1] is made. 2.2.2 Ch 5 Appendix 5 [2.1.3] The new paragraph [2.1.3] is added for the modelling of hull girder cross sections. The extent of hard corner elements from corners is taken equal to 20tp on transversely framed panels and to 0.5s on longitudinally framed panels. In cases where attached plating is made of steels having different thicknesses and/or yield stresses, average thickness and/or average yield stress are to be used in calculations. 2.2.3 Ch 5 Appendix 5, [2.2.1] to [2.2.8] The provisions regarding the definition of hard corners specified in [2.2.2] are shifted to a new paragraph [2.1.3]. In addition, the ways to calculate the load-end shortening curves of the following cases are explained: in cases where attached plating and stiffener are made of steels having different yield stresses; in cases where plate members are stiffened by non-continuous longitudinal stiffeners; in cases where openings are provided in stiffened plate elements; and, in cases where stiffened plate elements are provided.
3. Impact on Scantling
3.1 Chapter 5, Section 1, [2.2.2], [2.2.3] and [5.1.3] There is no change in terms of steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed rule change. 3.2 Chapter 5, Appendix 1, [2.1.1], [2.1.3], [2.2.1] to [2.2.8] There is no change in terms of steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed rule change.
PAGE 21 OF 171
Annex 1: Evaluation method of the load end shortening curve for stiffened panel where the attached plate and stiffener are made of steel having different yield stresses
1. Introduction
The evaluation methodology of hull girder ultimate strength in CSR-BC is based on Smiths method. In cases where any attached plates and stiffeners are made of steel having different yield stresses, the procedures and formulae for load end shortening curves are not described in the current Rules. The following two methods to deal with such elements were considered. (1) Using lower yield stresses. (2) Considering plate elements and stiffener elements to be separate elements, and calculating the load-end shortening curves for the stiffener and the attached plating separately as follows: For stiffeners: by adding attached plating having the same yield stress as the stiffener and then determining the shortening curve and the stress to be applied to the stiffener only. For attached plating: by adding a stiffener having the same yield stress as the attached plating and then determining the shortening curve and the stress to be applied to the attached plating only. Finally, load end shortening curves for stiffened panels can be obtained by adding the load end shortening curve for the stiffener to the load end shortening curve for the attached plating and dividing the sum by the total area of the stiffened panel. This method is called Method A. It has been confirmed that any load end shortening curve obtained by this method is nearly equal to that obtained by using the average yield stress considering areas of any stiffeners and attached plates. It is obvious that the method specified in (1) above gives a conservative load end shortening curve because the higher yield strengths of stiffeners or panels is not taking into account. On the other hand, because Method A is simple and easy to understand, this method has been indicated in the IACS KC DB 520 as a practicable approach to evaluate the load end shortening curves of stiffened panels with different yield stresses between attached plates and stiffeners However, there are some cases where Method A may give inadequate values of the load end shortening curves of stiffened panels of different materials used for the attached plate and the stiffener. Specifically, in cases where stiffened panel elements consist of attached plates of HT36 and stiffeners of HT 32, the load end shortening curves of such elements are sometimes overestimated in comparison to the results of 3D non-linear FEAs (FEA). On the contrary, in cases where elements consist of attached plates of HT32 and stiffeners of HT36, the load end shortening curves of such stiffened panel elements are sometimes underestimated in comparison to the results of FEA. Although stiffeners with yield stresses lower than that of attached plates are rarely used in actual ship design, any underestimated result obtained by Method A should be resolved. Since the areas of attached plates are larger than that of stiffeners in most cases, the load end shortening curve of the stiffened panel obtained by method A is affected by the yield strength of the attached plating. However, in reality, the yield stress of the stiffener has great impact on its load end shortening curve if beam-column buckling takes place, the parameters other than the areas of stiffeners and attached plates should be considered to accurately estimate the load end shortening curves of stiffened panels of attached plates and stiffeners having different yield stresses In order to reduce the dependency on the areas of attached panels, the first moment of stiffened panels instead of the areas of attached plates and stiffeners are considered. This method is called Method B. For example, using Method B, load end shortening curves of beam column buckling are calculated in the following manner:
PAGE 22 OF 171
lsE : distance to the top of the stiffener from the neutral axis of the stiffened panel having the attached plate with bE1
ReHp : yield stress of the attached plate bE1 : effective width of the attached plate ApE : area of the attached plate with effective breadth bE1. lpE : distance to the bottom of the attached plate from the neutral axis of the stiffened panel having the attached plate with bE1
Equivalent yield stress ReHB of the stiffened panel can be expressed by the following formula:
ReHB =
The load end shortening curve for the beam column buckling is obtained from the following formula:
CR1 = C1
where:
for
E1 E1 >
ReHB 2 ReHB 2
C1 = ReHB 1
ReHB 4 E1
for
E1
10 4
IE bE1
: Net moment of inertia of ordinary stiffeners, in cm4, with attached shell plating of width bE1 : Effective width, in m, of the attached shell plating, equal to:
b E1 = bE1 = s s
E = 103
s tp
ReHp
E
PAGE 23 OF 171
ApE
: Net sectional area, in cm2, of attached shell plating of width bE, equal to:
ApE = 10bE t p
bE : Effective width, in m, of the attached shell plating, equal to:
2.25 1.25 2 s bE = E E bE = s
3D non-linear FEAs are carried out for the purpose of verifying the accuracy of the ultimate strength of stiffened panels obtained by Method B as well as Method A.
2. FEA
96 cases of the collapse analyses of the stiffened panels with non-linear FEM have been performed. The scantlings of stiffened plates analysed are listed in Table 1. As seen in Fig.1, the stiffened panels are modelled in the range of double span double bay. Periodical continuous conditions are imposed along the edges of the model in the longitudinal and transverse directions. The material properties used in the analyses are as follows: Youngs Modulus : E = 206000 N/mm2 Poissons Ratio: n = 0.3 Strain Hardening Rate: =0 Case 1 : 315 N/mm2 for attached plate and 315 N/mm2 for stiffener Case 2 : 315 N/mm2 for attached plate and HT 355 N/mm2for stiffener (Different material case) Case 3 : 355 N/mm2 for attached plate and HT 315 N/mm2 for stiffener (Different material case) Case 4 : 355 N/mm2 for attached plate and 355 N/mm2 for stiffener Table 1 Scantling and yield strength of each analysis case
Stiffener Type Size (mm) Length a (mm) 2400 Angle 250x90x12/16 4000 800 5.0 Attached plate Breadth b (mm) 800 Aspect ratio (a/b) 3.0 Thickness tp (mm) 10 15 20 25 10 15 20 25 10 15 20 25 10 15 20 25 10 15 20 25 10 15
900
4.0
900
6.0
800 800
3.0 5.0
PAGE 24 OF 171
20 25
PAGE 25 OF 171
PAGE 26 OF 171
Fig. 7 Comparison on ultimate strength (Flat-bar a/b=5.0) In order to discuss the accuracy of the results of Method A and Method B, a ratio obtained by dividing the results of both methods into that of FEA is given in Fig. 8 to Fig. 13. Here, we call attention to the results of Case 2 and Case 3 in cases where any attached plates and stiffeners are made of steels having different yield stresses. The ultimate strengths of all of the calculation conditions in Case 3 evaluated by Method A always are greater than those in Case 3. In addition, the error (difference) becomes greater in those cases where the thickness of the attached plate with large aspect ratio becomes greater. This is because the ultimate strength of the stiffened panels is strongly affected by the yield strengths of attached plates. On the other hand, the error of any results obtained by Method B seems to be smaller than those obtained by Method A, and any tendencies obtained by Method A cannot be observed in the results obtained by Method C.
PAGE 27 OF 171
PAGE 28 OF 171
Fig. 13 Comparison on accuracy of estimation method (Flat-bar a/b=5.0) For the purpose of confirming the accuracy of any results obtained by Method A and Method B, average values and coefficients of variation (COV) are calculated and those results are given in Figure 14 and 15.
PAGE 29 OF 171
From Figure 15, it is obvious that the variance of any results obtained by method B is small. This means the accuracy of any results obtained by Method B is higher than those results obtained by Method A.
4. Conclusion
Two methods to estimate the ultimate strength of stiffened panels in cases where attached plates and stiffeners are made of steel having different yield stresses are considered. One is Method A, where the yield stress used in the estimation of beam-column buckling is calculated so as to be the weighted average value of the yield stresses of the stiffener and the attached plating according to their area. The other is method B, where the yield stress in the estimation of beam-column buckling is set to the weighted average value of the yield stresses of the stiffener and the attached plating according to the product of their areas and their distances from the neutral axis. In order to evaluate the accuracy of the ultimate strength of the stiffened panel obtained by both methods, the results obtained by both methods are compared to those obtained by 3D non-linear FEAs. From these comparison works, the following findings are obtained. (1) The method A is very simple and practicable, but it may overestimated the ultimate strength in the case that the yield strength of the stiffener is lower than that of the attach plating (2) Method B is not as simple and practicable as Method A, but it gives more accurate ultimate strength values for stiffened panels in comparison to those obtained by Method A. Therefore, in cases where attached panels and stiffeners are made of steel having different yield stresses, Method B should be used for the evaluation of the load end shortening curve thereof. The text in the RCP is based on this.
PAGE 30 OF 171
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 31 OF 171
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-2.
Symbols
For symbols not defined in this Section, refer to Ch 1, Sec 4. pS pW pC : Still water pressure, in kN/m2, defined in [4.1] : Wave pressure, in kN/m2, defined in [4.1] : Pressure acting on the hatch coaming, in kN/m2, defined in [6.2]
FS, FW : Coefficients taken equal to: FS = 0 and FW = 0.9 FS = 1.0 and FW = 1.0 s
l
for ballast water loads on hatch covers of the cargo ballast hold in other cases
: Length, in m, of the shorter side of the elementary plate panel : Length, in m, of the longer side of the elementary plate panel : Effective width, in m, of the plating attached to the ordinary stiffener or primary supporting member, defined in [3] : Net section modulus, in cm3, of the ordinary stiffener or primary supporting member, with an attached plating of width bp : Net shear sectional area, in cm2, of the ordinary stiffener or primary supporting member : Boundary coefficient for ordinary stiffeners and primary supporting members, taken equal to: m = 8 , in the case of ordinary stiffeners and primary supporting members simply supported at both ends or supported at one end and clamped at the other end m = 12 , in the case of ordinary stiffeners and primary supporting members clamped at both ends
bp w
Ash m
tC
1. General
1.5 Allowable stresses
1.5.1 Ref. ILLC, as amended (Resolution MSC.143(77) Reg. 15(6) and 16(5))
PAGE 32 OF 171
a, in N/mm2
0.80 ReH 0.68 ReH 0.90 ReH
a, in N/mm2
0.46 ReH 0.39 ReH 0.51 ReH
Weathertight hatch cover Pontoon hatch cover Weathertight hatch cover and pontoon hatch cover
External pressure, as defined in Ch 4, Sec 5, [2][5.2.1] Other loads, as defined in Ch 4 ,Sec 5, [5.1.1] and Ch 4, Sec 6, [2]
5. Strength check
5.2 Plating
5.2.3 Critical buckling stress check The compressive stress in the hatch cover plating, induced by the bending of primary supporting members,
parallel to the direction of ordinary stiffeners is to comply with the following formula:
0.88 C1 S
where: S : Safety factor defined in Ch 6, Sec 3 : Critical buckling stress, in N/mm2, taken equal to:
C1
C1 = E1 C1 = ReH 1
for
ReH for 4 E1
E1 E1 >
ReH 2 ReH 2
E1 = 3.6 E
t
t 1000 s
The compressive stress in the hatch cover plating, induced by the bending of primary supporting members, perpendicular to the direction of ordinary stiffeners is to comply with the following formula:
0.88 C2 S
where: S : Safety factor defined in Ch 6, Sec 3 : Critical buckling stress, in N/mm2, taken equal to:
C2
C2 = E2 C 2 = ReH 1
ReH 4 E 2
for
for
E2 E2 >
ReH 2 ReH 2
E 2 = 0.9 m E
t 1000 s s
PAGE 33 OF 171
2.1 + 1.1
t ss
ls
: Net thickness, in mm, of plate panel : Length, in m, of the shorter side of the plate panel : Length, in m, of the longer side of the plate panel : Ratio between smallest and largest compressive stress : Coefficient taken equal to: c = 1.3 when plating is stiffened by primary supporting members c = 1.21 when plating is stiffened by ordinary stiffeners of angle or T type c = 1.1 when plating is stiffened by ordinary stiffeners of bulb type c = 1.05 when plating is stiffened by flat bar c = 1.30 when plating is stiffened by ordinary stiffeners of U type. The higher c value but not greater than 2.0 may be taken if it is verified by buckling strength check of panel using non-linear FEA and deemed appropriate by the Society. An averaged value of c is to be used for plate panels having different edge stiffeners.
In addition, Tthe bi-axial compression stress in the hatch cover plating, when calculated by means of finite element analysis, is to comply with the requirements in Ch 6, Sec 3.
4mm.
in [5.2.2] 6mm.
PAGE 34 OF 171
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 35 of 171
2.2 Table 2 The reference is changed to Ch 4 Sec 5 [5.2.1] from Ch 4 Sec 5 [2] and clarification of other load is made. 2.3 5.2.3 Critical buckling stress 2.3.1 Application of buckling check The used stress for buckling check is clarified as follows. For uni-axial compression stress, the stress is obtained by a grillage analysis. For bi-axial compression stress, the stresses are obtained by a FEA 2.3.2 c or F1 factor for ordinary stiffener of U type According to the results specified in Annex 1, the coefficient c for ordinary stiffener of Utype can be taken to higher value than 1.3. However, c value depends on the aspect ratio as shown in Annex 1. Therefore, the coefficient c is taken equal to 1.3 as a minimum, but the higher value may be used if it is verified by buckling strength check of panel using non-linear FEA and deemed
appropriate by the Society.
In addition, the treatment of the different edge stiffeners is added according to Table 1 in Ch 6 Sec 3.
2.4 5.3.2 Minimum thickness of web of ordinary stiffener and 5.4.2 Minimum thickness of Primary supporting member (1) The relation to the distance between ordinary stiffeners (tmin = 10s) is only valid for the hatch cover plating. Therefore this requirement is deleted the reference to the minimum thickness of hatch cover plate for ordinary stiffeners and primary supporting. (2) In addition to the change, described in (1) above, the minimum net web thickness of ordinary stiffener of 6mm has been changed to 4mm. (3) In addition to the change, described in (2) above, the minimum net thickness of 6mm is specified in the requirement for web of primary supporting member, but the value is the same as the current Rule.
PAGE 37 OF 171
Annex 1: Technical Background for the Changes regarding F1 factor for transverse compressed plate fields in buckling check of hatch cover plating
1. Reason for the Rule Change in Ch 9 Sec 5 [5.2.3]
It was requested to make an interpretation for the factor c in case of U-type stiffener in buckling assessment of hatch covers. The factor c considers the torsion stiffness of the longitudinal stiffener of an elementary plate panel under transverse compression loads. The following values are given in the URS 11:
c = 1.3 when plating is stiffened by primary supporting members c = 1.21 when plating is stiffened by ordinary stiffeners of angle or T type c = 1.1 when plating is stiffened by ordinary stiffeners of bulb type c = 1.05 when plating is stiffened by flat bar
The intention of this RC is to make a proposal for the c factor for U-type stiffener
PAGE 38 OF 171
Influence of longitudinal stiffeners with high torsional stiffness of the buckling behaviour of transverse loaded plate panels (t=25mm)
2,0 1,8 1,6 1,4 kappa, F1 1,2 1,0 0,8 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,0 1 2 3 4 5 alpha 6 7 8 9 10 kappa BLC2 kappa BLC 9 c=f(BLC2,9) kappa mean c_mean
Influence of longitudinal stiffeners with high torsional stiffness of the buckling behaviour of transverse loaded plate panels (t=15mm)
3,0 2,5 2,0 kappa, F1 1,5 1,0 0,5 0,0 1 2 3 4 5 alpha 6 7 8 9 10 kappa BLC2 kappa BLC 9 c=f(BLC2,9) kappa mean c_mean
PAGE 39 OF 171
Influence of longitudinal stiffeners with high torsional stiffness of the buckling behaviour of transverse loaded plate panels (t=7mm)
4,0 3,5 3,0 kappa, F1 2,5 2,0 1,5 1,0 0,5 0,0 1 2 3 4 5 alpha 6 7 8 9 10 kappa BLC2 kappa BLC 9 c=f(BLC2,9) kappa mean c_mean
The diagrams show the following dependencies With decreasing thickness the c factor increases With decreasing thickness the range of a constant c factor increases Different hatch cover designs show aspect ratios between 3 and 8 with a majority of ratios between 3 and 6. The plate thickness is typically below 10mm. For these parameter ranges a c factor of 2.0 may be assumed. To be in line with the simple definitions of c in URS 11 a constant c value of 1.3 can be used regardless of the thickness and aspect ratio. The diagrams leads to the assumption, that a higher value might be possible, taking the aspect ratio and plate thickness into account. But this has to be verified as a future development for CSR-BC.
PAGE 40 OF 171
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 41 OF 171
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-3.
The roll period TR, in s, and the single roll amplitude , in deg, are given by: 2.3kr TR = GM
9000(1.25 0.025T R ) f p k b
(B + 75)
where: kb : Coefficient taken equal to: kb = 1.2 for ships without bilge keel kb = 1.0 for ships with bilge keel kr GM : Roll radius of gyration, in m, in the considered loading condition. When kr is not known, the values indicated in Tab 1 may be assumed. : Metacentric height, in m, in the considered loading condition. When GM is not known, the values indicated in Tab 1 may be assumed.
Table 1: Values of kr and GM Loading condition (Alternate or homogeneous loading) Full load condition Steel coil loading Normal ballast condition Heavy ballast condition
PAGE 42 OF 171
Section 1 PLATING
2. General requirements
2.7 Inner bottom loaded by steel coils on a wooden support
2.7.1 General The net thickness of inner bottom, bilge hopper sloping plate and inner hull for ships intended to carry steel
coils is to comply with [2.7.2] to [2.7.4]. The provision is determined by assuming Fig 2 as the standard means of securing steel coils. In case where steel coils are lined up two or more tier, formulae in [2.7.2] and [2.7.3] can be applied to the case that only lowest tier of steel coils is in contact with hopper sloping plate or inner hull plate. In other cases, scantlings of plate thickness are calculated by direct strength analysis or other procedures.
Figure 2: Inner bottom loaded by steel coils 2.7.1 bis1 Accelerations In order to calculate the accelerations, the following coordinates are to be used for the centre of gravity.
xG sc = 0.75 l forward of aft bulkhead, where the hold of which the mid position is located forward from H
0,45L from A.E.
PAGE 43 OF 171
xG sc = 0.75 l afterward of fore bulkhead, where the hold of which the mid position is located afterward from H
0,45L from A.E.
yG sc =
Bh 4
3 d zG sc = hDB + 1 + (n1 1) sc 2 2
where:
Bh dsc hDB
lH
: 1.0 when a port side structural member is considered , or -1.0 when a starboard side structural member is considered. : breadth in m, at the mid of the hold, of the cargo hold at the level of connection of bilge hopper plate with side shell or inner hull : diameter of steel coils, in m : height of inner bottom, in m : Cargo hold length, in m
Vertical acceleration aZ, in m/s2,.are to be calculated by the formulae defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [3.2] and tangential acceleration aR due to roll, in m/s2 .is to be calculated by the following formula.
2
aR =
where:
180 TR
y G _ SC + R 2
2
(g + aZ )F
P RY
t = K1
where: K1
{g (cos(C ZP )cos(C ZR )) + a z }F
P RY
aZ
: Vertical acceleration, in m/s2, defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [3.2] [2.7.1 bis1] : Single pitch amplitude, in deg, defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.2] : Single roll amplitude, in deg, defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.1]
PAGE 44 OF 171
F = K S n1W
P
KS
: Coefficient defined in Tab 6 : Coefficient taken equal to: KS = 1.4 KS = 1.0 when steel coils are lined up in one tier with a key coil in other cases
W n1 n2
: Mass of one steel coil, in kg : Number of tiers of steel coils : Number of load points per elementary plate panel of inner bottom (See Figs 3 and 4), taken equal to. When n3 5 , n 2 can be obtained from Tab 3 according to the values of n3 and l / l S in case of steel coils loaded as shown in Fig 3, n2 is obtained from Tab 3 according to the values of n3 and l/lS in case of steel coils loaded as shown in Fig 4, n2 = n3
n3
: Number of dunnages supporting one steel coil : Length of a steel coil, in m : Coefficient taken equal to:
s s l K 2 = + + 1.37 l l s
2 2
lS
K2
l' 1 + 2.33 l
: Distance, in m, between outermost load points per elementary plate panel of inner bottom plate in ship length, taken equal to: (See Figs 3 and 4). When n 2 10 and n3 5 , l can be obtained from Tab 4 according to the values of l, lS, n2 and n3. When n 2 > 10 or n3 > 5 , l is to be taken equal to l. in case of steel coils loaded as shown in Fig 3, l is obtained from Tab 4 according to the values of
l, lS, n2 and n3
[g cos( 1 2 ) + aY sin 1 ]F
P RY
t = K1
a hopper F '
p Ry
PAGE 45 OF 171
1 h : Angle, in deg, between inner bottom plate and bilge hopper sloping plate or inner hull plateing
2
aY
: Single roll amplitude, in deg, defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.1] : Transverse acceleration, in m/s2, defined in Ch 4, Sec2, [3.2]
yG _ sc ahopper = CYR a R sin tan 1 h + g cos( h CYG ) cos(C XG ) + CYS a sway sin h R
aR asway yG_sc R
F
: tangential acceleration defined in [2.7.1 bis1]. : Transverse acceleration due to sway, in m/s2, defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.4]
CXG, CYS, CYR, CYG: Load combination factors defined in Ch 4, Sec 4, [2.2] : Centre of gravity in transverse direction, in m, defined in [2.7.1 bis1] : Coefficient defined in Ch 4 Sec 2, [3.2.1] : Force, in kg, taken equal to:
F = Wn 2 C k n3 l lS
for n 2 10 and n3 5
F ' = CkW
: Coefficient taken equal to: Ck = 4.03.2 when steel coils are lined up two or more tier, or when steel coils are lined up one tier and key coil is located second or third from bilge hopper sloping plate or inner hull plate Ck = 2.52.0 for other cases
Steel coil
Dunnage
Inner bottom
Floor
Bottom
PAGE 46 OF 171
'
Floor
Figure 4: Loading condition of steel coils (Example of n 2 = 3 , n3 = 3 ) 2.7.4 Where the number of load points per elementary plate panel n2 is greater than 10 and/or the number of dunnages n3 is greater than 5, the inner bottom may be considered as loaded by a uniform distributed load. In such a case, the thickness of the inner bottom plating is to be obtained according to [3.2.1]. (void)
PAGE 47 OF 171
n3 = 2
l 0.5 lS 0<
n3 = 3
l 0.33 lS 0<
n3 = 4
l 0.25 lS 0<
n3 = 5
l 0.2 lS
0.5 < 1.2 < 1.7 < 2.4 < 2.9 < 3.6 < 4.1 < 4.8 < 5.3 <
0.33 <
l 0.67 lS l 1.2 lS
l 0.5 lS
0.2 < 0.4 < 0.6 < 0.8 < 1.2 < 1.4 < 1.6 < 1.8 < 2.0 <
0.67 < 1.2 < 1.53 < 1.87 < 2.4 < 2.73 < 3.07 < 3.6 <
l 0.75 lS l 1.2 lS
l 1.45 lS l 1.7 lS
l 1.95 lS l 2.4 lS
l 2.65 lS l 2.9 lS
l 3.93 lS
2.65 <
Table 4: Distance between load points in ship length direction per elementary plate panel of inner bottom n2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 n3 2 3 Actual breadth of dunnage 0.5lS 0.33lS 1.2lS 0.67lS 1.7lS 1.20lS 2.4lS 1.53lS 2.9lS 1.87lS 3.6lS 2.40lS 4.1lS 2.73lS 4.8lS 3.07lS 5.3lS 3.60lS 4 5
PAGE 48 OF 171
2. General requirements
2.5 Ordinary stiffeners of inner bottom loaded by steel coils on a wooden support
2.5.1 General The requirements of this sub-article apply to the ordinary stiffeners located on inner bottom plate, bilge hopper
sloping plate and inner hull plate when loaded by steel coils on a wooden support (dunnage), as indicated in Fig 2 of Ch 6, Sec 1. In case where steel coils are lined up two or more tier, formulae in [2.5.2] and [2.5.3] can be applied to the case that only lowest tier of steel coils is in contact with hopper sloping plate or inner hull plate. In other cases, scantlings of net section modulus and net shear section area are calculated by direct strength analysis or other procedures.
2.5.2 Ordinary stiffeners located on inner bottom plating The net section modulus w, in cm3, and the net shear sectional area Ash, in cm2, of single span ordinary stiffeners
located on inner bottom plating are to be not less than the values obtained from the following formulae:
w = K3 Ash =
(g + a Z )F
8 S RY
5(g + a Z )F 3 10 a sin
w = K3
[g cos(C ZP ) cos(C ZR ) + a Z ] F
8 S RY
Ash =
where: K3
aZ
: Coefficient defined in Tab 1. When n 2 is greater than 10, K 3 is to be taken equal to 2l/3 : Vertical acceleration, in m/s2, defined in Ch 4, Sec2, [3.2] Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.1 bis1] : Single pitch amplitude, in deg, defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.2] : Single roll amplitude, in deg, defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.1]
: Force, in kg, defined in Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.2] : Coefficient defined in Tab 3 : Angle, in deg, defined in [3.2.3].
PAGE 49 OF 171
Ordinary stiffeners located on bilge hopper sloping plate or inner hull plateing
The net section modulus w , in cm3, and the net shear sectional area Ash , in cm2, of single span ordinary stiffeners located on bilge hopper sloping plate and inner hull plate are to be not less than the values obtained from the following formulae:
w = K3 Ash =
w = K3
a hopper F ' 8 S RY
Ash =
where: K3 1, 2
5a hopper F '
a sin
10 3
: Coefficient defined in Tab 1. When n 2 > 10 , K 3 is taken equal to 2l/3. : Angles, in deg, defined in Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.3] : Angle, in deg, between inner bottom plate and bilge hopper sloping plate or inner hull plate : Transverse acceleration, in m/s2, defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [3.2]
h
aY
: Force, in kg, defined in Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.3] : Coefficient defined in Tab 3 : Angle, in deg, defined in [3.2.3] : Angle, in deg, between inner bottom plating and hopper sloping plate or inner hull plating. : Distance, in m, between load points per elementary plate panel of inner bottom plate in ship length, sloping plate or inner hull plating, as defined in Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.2].
l'
l
: Distance, in m, between outermost load points per elementary plate panel in ship length
Table 1 : Coefficient K3
n2
K3
1
l
2
l l l
'2
3
l 2l 3l
'2
4
l 5l 9l
'2
5
l l 2l
'2
6
l 7l 15l
'2
7
l 4l 9l
'2
8
l 3l 7l
'2
9
l 5l 12l
'2
10
l 11l ' 2 27l
2.5.4
Where the number of load points per elementary plate panel n2 is greater than 10 and/or the number of dunnages n3 is greater than 5, the inner bottom may be considered as loaded by a uniform distributed load. In such a case, the scantling of the inner bottom ordinary stiffeners is to be obtained according to [3.2.3]. (void)
PAGE 50 OF 171
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 51 OF 171
Technical Background for the Change Regarding Scantling Formula for Steel Coil Loading
1. Background of Rule change regarding steel coil loading
1.1 Addition of GM and kr value for steel coil loading to the note of Table 1 in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.1.1] Roll radius of gyration ( k r ) and metacentric height ( GM ) in the considered loading condition is used for the calculation of the parameters regarding the ships absolute motion and accelerations. When these values are not known, the default values specified in Table 1 in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.1.1] may be assumed in the current CSR. However, these default values specified in the Table do not correspond to the steel coil loading condition because the steel coil load is normally concentrated near the inner bottom. The rule change is made to set the GM value based on the actual design values given in Table 1 and the averaged values of GM and kr is about 0.24B and 0.42B, respectively. Table 1 Actual GM Value
The GM and kr value for steel coil loading are newly added to Table 1 in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.1.1] as a default value.
1.2 Modification of the requirements in Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.1] and Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.5.1] The 3rd sentence and the 4th sentence in Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.1] and the 2nd sentence and the 3rd sentence in Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.5.1] are deleted due to the following reasons. (a) As the term of the acceleration in the scantling formula is revised in order to accommodate any loading pattern of steel coil as mentioned in Annex 1, the limitation of the rule application regarding the loading pattern is not necessary. (b) In addition, CSR does not permit overruling the scantling determined by the prescriptive requirement by FEA. 1.3 Clarification of the treatment of centre of gravity for steel coil loading If the actual centre of gravity in steel coil loaded condition is known, it is better to use the actual one in calculating the acceleration. Therefore, this treatment has been added to the text. If the actual centre of gravity is not known, the standard value of the centre of gravity is needed. Then the centre of gravity (x, y, z ) is set up mid hold , Bh 4 , hDB + 1 + (n1 1) 3 2 d SC 2 as a
conservative manner, where Bh is defined as a breadth of the cargo hold and is 1.0 when a port
side structural member is considered, or -1.0 when a starboard side structural member is considered.
PAGE 52 OF 171
1.4 Amendment of the formulae for plating and ordinary stiffeners of inner bottom, bilge hopper and inner hull In the current formulae for inner bottom plating and ordinary stiffeners (inner bottom longitudinals), load cases H and F are only considered but the load cases R and P is not considered. The rule change is made to consider the all load cases. The current formulae for plating and ordinary stiffeners of bilge hopper and inner hull give the excessive scantling due to the account of gravity acceleration in duplicate and conservative coefficient C k . In addition, formula for shear area of the ordinary stiffeners is modified. 1.5 Amendment of the treatment which the number of load points per elementary plate panel is greater than 10 and/or the number of dunnages is greater than 5. In the current requirements, the number of load points per elementary plate panel n 2 is greater than 10 and/or the number of dunnages n3 is greater than 5, the scantling of plating and ordinary stiffeners may be checked by the formulae based on uniform distributed loads. However, this assumption is inappropriate because the scantling formula for steel coil is based on the line load which is transformed from the concentrated loads due to steel coil acting on the most severe locations of an elementary plate panel. Even if the number of load points becomes larger than 10, this assumption for the load model should be kept. Therefore, the texts of Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.4] and Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.5.4] are deleted. Furthermore, in order to clarify the treatment where the number of load points per elementary plate panel is greater than 10 and/or the number of dunnages is greater than 5, the relevant text is revised. The technical backgrounds of these modifications are described in Annex 1.
aR =
180 TR Where,
y SC + R 2
2
Bh 4
R: Coefficient defined in Ch 4 Sec 2, [3.2.1] of the Rules TR: Roll period, in s, defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.1.1] of the Rules Bh: breadth in m, at the mid of the hold. In order to consider the acceleration of pitch, although the effect is very small because the hold length is relative short, the definition of xG_SC is added as follows. xG sc = 0.75 l forward of aft bulkhead, where the hold of which the mid position is located forward
H
PAGE 53 OF 171
xG sc = 0.75l afterward of fore bulkhead, where the hold of which the mid position is located H afterward from 0,45L from A.E The backgrounds of these modifications are described in Annex 1
2.4 Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.2] The scantling formula for load cases H and F is revised in order to consider all load cases. In addition, the interpretation of the case where n2>10 or n3>5 is added.
t = K1
{g (cos(CZP ) cos(CZR )) + az }F
P RY
F = K S n1W
Definitions of all symbols are specified in the Rule text. 2.5 Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.3] In the current formula, the gravity component is accounted in duplicate because the acceleration ay contains the component of gravity acceleration. The formula is corrected to consider the gravity acceleration component correctly and to correspond to the all load case. In addition, the coefficient ck is changed based on the experimental data.
t = K1 a hopper F '
p Ry
Wn2Ck n3 l F ' = CkW lS F '=
y G _ SC h + g cos(h CYG ) cos(C XG ) + CYS a sway sin h a hopper = CYR a R sin tan 1 R Definitions of all symbols are specified in the Rule text.
2.6 Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.4] As the interpretation of the cases where n2>10 and/or n3>5 are added to the paragraph [2.7.3], the paragraph [2.7.4] is deleted. 2.7 Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.5.1] The 2nd and the 3rd sentences are deleted. 2.8 Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.5.2] and [2.5.3] The formulae for all load cases are provided as similar to the revision of the scantling formula for plating in Ch 6 Sec 1. 2.9 Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.5.4] As the interpretation of the cases where n2>10 and/or n3>5 are added to the paragraph [2.5.3], this paragraph is deleted.
PAGE 54 OF 171
PAGE 55 OF 171
PAGE 56 OF 171
The load due to steel coils acts on an elementary plate panel as a concentrated load through dunnages. However, it is difficult to treat concentrated loads directly because the location of concentrated loads and the distance between concentrated loads depend on the loading pattern and size of dunnage. Then, the following assumptions regarding the loads due to steel coils are considered. (1) Loads due to steel coils act along a centreline of a plate panel. (2) A rectangular load instead of concentrated loads is used in order to be on the safer side considering the interaction between concentrated loads.
Steel coil
z l x Floor
Floor
dunnage
s x
l' l
Fig.3 Convert concentrated loads to rectangular loads As it is the most severe when loads act on the inner bottom vertically, the vertical acceleration is considered for the scantling formula of inner bottom structures. The position of the centre of gravity is given by the following. x direction: (i) for the hold of which the mid position is located forward of 0.45L from A.E.: XG_SC =
0.75 lH forward of aft bulkhead, and (ii) for the hold of which the mid position is located afterward of 0.45L from A.E.: XG_SC= 0.75 lH afterward of fore bulkhead, where lH is a cargo hold length y direction: Bh 4 , measured from the centreline
z direction: h DB + 1 + (n 1) 3 2 d SC 2
Where, d SC : The diameter, in m, of steel coil h DB : The height, in m, of double bottom Bh: breadth, in m, at the mid of the hold
PAGE 57 OF 171
2 3 dSC 2 3 dSC 2
dSC 2 hDB
hDB
Bottom plating
As mentioned in 2.7.2a, the rectangular load acts along the centreline of the panel. Its length l ' is determined by the panel length l , the length of a steel coil l S , the number of load points n 2 and the number of dunnages supporting one steel coil n3 , and its width 0.3s is derived from dunnage width based on the actual loading data. Of course, the axial stress due to hull girder bending is considered in addition to the lateral rectangular load due to the steel coils. An elementary plate panel is collapsed like Fig.5. The boundary conditions of an elementary plate panel are that all sides are considered fixed.
l
s l'
0.3s
Tables 3 and 4 in Ch 6, Sec 1 of the Rules give the standard number of load points and distances between load points in ship length direction for the case of n 2 10 and/or n3 5 . For other cases, the current treatment as noted in Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.4] stipulates that loads due to steel coils are considered as a uniform distribution load and the scantling of plating is obtained according to Ch 6, Sec 1, [3.2.1]. However, it is considered that the scantlings of plating and ordinary stiffeners under steel coil loads are treated separately from those for distributed loads. Therefore, the instruction in Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.4] is not appropriate and it has been deleted. Instead a line load at panel centreline is assumed throughout the panel length.
PAGE 58 OF 171
The calculation results are shown in Table 1. In this calculation, the coefficient n3 is changed from 3 to 6, the coefficient n 2 is derived from the same procedure gotten from Tables 3 and 4 in Ch 6, Sec 1 of the Rules. The calculation results according to the generic formula for plating and ordinary stiffener specified in Ch 6, Sec 1, [3.2.1] and Sec 2, [3.2.3] of the Rules are calculated by assuming that the loads due to steel coils are treated as uniformly distributed loads defined as (Wl/ls). It is found from this result that the required net thickness and net section modulus for uniform load is greater than those for load model specified in the Rules. In order to eliminate this difference between the case of n2>10 and/or n3>5 and the case of n2<=10 and n3<=5, the treatment of the case n2>10 and/or n3>5 is added to the Rules and current paragraphs [2.7.4] of Ch 6 Sec 1 and [2.5.4] of Ch 6, Sec 2 are deleted. Table 1 Comparison of required scantlings Line load according to Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.2] and Uniform load according Sec 2, [2.5.2] to Ch 6, Sec 1, [3.2.1] 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 2 2 2 2 5 6 7 9 3 4 5 6 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.53 1 1.45 1 1.40 1 1.53 1 15000 15000 15000 15000 50000 45000 42000 45000 45000(n2=6) 15.8 15.4 15.0 15.0 17.5 391 400 399 401 432
l (m) s (m) n1 n2 n3 ls (m) l (m) W (kg) F (kg) tnet_req (mm) wnet_req (cm3)
2.7.2d Coefficient KS
When steel coils are lined up in one tier with a key coil as shown in Fig.1 (A), two coils support a key coil. However, it is known that half of the weight of a key coil does not act on the supporting coil due to the frictional resistance between steel coils. In order to investigate the effect of the frictional resistance between steel coils, parametric experiments were carried out by the Shipbuilding Research Association of Japan. If the force due to steel coils is expressed by the following formula, the effect of frictional resistance ( K S ) is given in Table 2. Wn1 n 2 F = KS n3 Where, W : Mass of one steel coil, in kg n1 : Number of tier of steel coils n 2 : Number of load points per elementary panel n : Number of dunnages supporting steel coil
PAGE 59 OF 171
This result shows that the effect of the frictional resistance depends on the diameter of steel coils and distance between the centres of coils. The average value is 1.38, and therefore K S is taken to equal to 1.4 to be on the safe side.
2.7.2e Coefficient K1 and K2 The coefficients K 1 and K 2 are derived from the principle of virtual work based on material physics. 2.7.2f Formula for required thickness of inner bottom plating Finally, the scantling formula for inner bottom plating is given as follows. {g (cos(C ZP )cos(C ZR )) + a z }F t = K1 P RY
F = K S n1W
The load model for hopper sloping and inner hull plating is very complex because the loads are supported by the inner bottom directly or by other steel coils as shown in Fig.6.
Fig.6 The examples of steel coil loading conditions The force due to steel coils for bilge hopper sloping plate and inner hull plate is expressed by the following formula considering the effect of frictional resistance between steel coils and the support by the inner bottom. Wn2 C k F'= n3 Where, W , n 2 and n3 are specified in 2.7.2d. C k : The coefficient specified in 2.7.3c.
PAGE 60 OF 171
This load model is the same for the inner bottom. Although the vertical component of the load is supported by the inner bottom directly or by other coils, only Ck is considered to derive the loads acting on the side wall. As specified in 2.7.3c, the coefficient Ck is introduced based on the experiments. This coefficient Ck is based on the component of the load in the transverse direction. Therefore, the component of the load in transverse direction is only considered in the scantling formula for bilge hopper plate and inner hull plate. In the original formula specified in the current Rule text, it was considered that the equivalent design wave (EDW) R was dominant in the bilge hopper sloping plate or inner hull plate. However, as the acceleration in transverse direction specified in Ch 4 Sec 2, [3.2.1] includes the static component due to roll angle, the static component due to gravity acceleration is counted in duplicate. Therefore, the term related to the transverse acceleration in scantling formula for load case R is revised. In addition, in order to cover all load cases, the term related to the acceleration in the scantling formula is revised as follows, considering the load combination factors. y G _ SC h + g cos( h CYG ) cos(C XG ) + CYS a sway sin h a hopper = CYR a R sin tan 1 R Where: 2 a roll y asway : Acceleration due to roll and sway, in m/s , defined in Ch.4 Sec.2 [3.2]
a R : Tangential roll acceleration, in m/s . (See Fig. 7) 2 2 y G sc 2 + R 2 aR = 180 TR y G sc : Centre of gravity of steel coils in transverse direction, in m. (see Fig, 7) R : Coefficient defined in Ch. 4 Sec. 2 [3.2.1]. (see Fig.7) TR : Roll period, in s, defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.1]
2
Gravity acceleration, in m/s2 h : Angle, in degrees, between inner bottom plating and bilge hopper sloping plate or inner hull plate. (see Fig. 7) : Single roll amplitude, in degrees, defined in Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.1] CYG, CYR, CYS, CXG: Load combination factors defined in Ch 4, Sec 4, [2.2]
g:
PAGE 61 OF 171
h yG-sc R
aR
h CL Centre of gravity
The structural model for bilge hopper sloping plating and inner hull plating is the same for inner bottom plating.
2.7.3c Coefficient Ck
In order to determine the coefficient C k specified in 2.7.3a, experiments were performed by the Shipbuilding Research Association of Japan. According to the report, the experiments were carried out under the following conditions specified in (a) to (d) and as shown in Fig.8.
m Key coil n Dunnage Side shell Strain gauge a D
Note: m and n is the number of coils counted from the key coil. Fig.8 Experiment device and loading condition of steel coils (a) (b) (c) (d) Steel coils were loaded with one tier with key coil Roll angle was 20 degree Roll period was 60 seconds Position of key coil was changed (m in Fig.8 was changed from 1 to 8)
In addition, a theoretical analysis was tried and the results are shown in Fig. 9. According to the results shown in Fig. 9, the following outcomes were obtained.
PAGE 62 OF 171
i) The Ck value is obtained from the loads on side wall based on the force in transverse direction. ii) The C k value strongly depends on the location of the key coil. iii) The effect of the diameter of steel coils and the length between the gravity centre of steel coils is relatively small compared to the effect of the location of the key coil. iv) The calculation results match the experimental results well. v) In order to be on the safe side, C k = 3.2 is an appropriate value when the key coil is located second or third from the side shell and C k = 2.0 is appropriate in other cases.
Ck :
Coefficient taken to equal: C k = 3.2 when steel coils are lined up in two or more tiers, or steel coils are lined up in one tier and the key coil is located second or third from the bilge hopper sloping plating or inner hull plating C k = 2 .0 for other cases
3.2
Ck
Calculation
m-n
Ch 6, Sec 2
2.5 Ordinary stiffeners of inner bottom loaded with steel coils on a wooden support 2.5.1 General
2.5.1a Same as specified in 2.7 for plating.
2.5.2 Ordinary stiffeners located on inner bottom plating 2.5.2a Load model As the structural model for plating is based on the plastic theory, it is too complex to treat the concentrated load. Therefore, a rectangular load is considered in the requirement for plating mentioned in Ch 6, Sec 1, [2.7.2]. On the other hand, the structural model for ordinary stiffeners is based on the simple elastic beam theory. Therefore, the load model for ordinary stiffeners is based on concentrated loads due to steel coils acting through the dunnage.
PAGE 63 OF 171
The calculation of acceleration is based on the same assumption for plating. The parameter and coefficients are also the same for plating. According to the similar reason specified in 2.7.2c, Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.5.4] has been deleted.
2.5.2b Structural model Structural model of ordinary stiffeners is based on the simple beam theory with the boundary condition that both ends of beams are fixed. 2.5.2c Coefficient K3 The coefficient K 3 is derived from the ratios of moments at ends of ordinary stiffeners against n 2 = 1 when load points of the concentrated loads are located evenly between l ' as shown in Fig.10 When n 2 is over 10, the coefficient K 3 is 2/3.
P P/2 P/2
l' n2=1 P/3 P/3 l' n2=3 P/3 P/4 P/4 l' n2=4 n2=2
P/4
P/4
PAGE 64 OF 171
2 Not used
2 Not used
2 Not used
PAGE 65 OF 171
For reference, the required thicknesses of bilge hopper sloping plating was increased by 3 to 4mm compared to those of pre-CSR designs because the corrosion additions specified in CSR are larger by 3 to 4mm than those used in the pre-CSR designs. For CSR ships, the thicknesses of bilge hopper plating are determined by the requirement for steel coil loading, but, the scantling of longitudinal attached to the hopper sloping plate may be determined by the requirement other than that for steel coil loading. As a result, only thickness of hopper sloping plate according to the proposed formula becomes that similar to inner bottom plating and decreased about 4mm for these example cases. If the thicknesses of hopper sloping plate would be determined by the proposed requirement for steel coil loading, the total steel weight is decreased about 20 tons for ship 5 and 15 tons for ship 6 by this change.
2.2 Scantlings of ordinary stiffeners 2.2.1 Section modulus Required net section moduli of ordinary stiffeners attached to bilge hopper sloping plating are shown in Fig. 2-5. This figure shows that the modification improves the formula by providing the appropriate section modulus compared to that of inner bottom longitudinals. Regarding the bilge hopper longitudinal, the difference between the required section modulus and actual one of Pre-CSR designs varies largely depending on the design. For CSR ships, the scantlings of longitudinal attached to hopper sloping plate become about 60% of those required current rules in terms of section modulus by this change. Therefore, the final scantlings of the longitudinal may be determined by other requirements. If the scantling of longitudinals would be determined by the proposed formula, the steel weight will be decreased about 4 tons for ship 5 and 2 tons for ship 6 by this change. 2.2.2 Section area Required net section areas of ordinary stiffeners fitted to the bilge hopper sloping plating are shown in Fig.2-6. The required section area according to modified formulae is larger than those of current CSR. This increase is caused by the correction of a mistake in the formula. For reference, the required shear area according to the modified formula is smaller than the actual one of both pre-CSR designs and CSR ships.
PAGE 66 OF 171
30
25
20
15
10
Ship 1
Ship 2
Ship 3
Ship 4
Ship 5
Ship 6
1000
800
600
400
200
Ship 1
Ship 2
Ship 3
Ship 4
Ship 5
Ship 6
PAGE 67 OF 171
35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0
Ship 1
Ship 2
Ship 3
Ship 4
Ship 5
Ship 6
Ship 1
Ship 2
Ship 3
Ship 4
Ship 5
Ship 6
PAGE 68 OF 171
1200
800
600
400
200
Ship 1
Ship 2
Ship 3
Ship 4
Ship 5
Ship 6
Fig.2-5 Comparison of net section moduli of longitudinals attached to bilge hopper sloping plate
35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0
Ship 1
Ship 2
Ship 3
Ship 4
Ship 5
Ship 6
Fig.2-6 Comparison of net section area of longitudinals attached to bilge hopper sloping plate
PAGE 69 OF 171
PAGE 70 OF 171
Rule Change Notice No.1-4 (Minimum Scantling, Side Frame and Grab)
Notes: (1) These Rule Changes enter into force on 1 July 2009.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 71 OF 171
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-4.
t = 3.0 + 0.015L2 40% of the net required offered thickness of the attached plating, to be determined according to Ch.6, Sec.1.
and is to be less than 2 times the net offered thickness of the attached plating
2.2.2 Minimum net thicknesses of sSide frames of single side bulk carriers The net thickness of side frame webs within the cargo area, in mm, is to be not less than the value obtained from the following formula: tMIN = 0.75 (7 + 0.03L) where: : Coefficient taken equal to: = 1.15 for the frame webs in way of the foremost hold
3. Yielding check
3.3 Strength criteria for side frames of single side bulk carriers
3.3.1 Net section modulus and net shear sectional area of side frames The net section modulus w, in cm3, and the net shear sectional area Ash , in cm2, of side frames subjected to
lateral pressure are to be not less, in the mid-span area, than the values obtained from the following formulae:
w = 1.125 m
( p S + pW )sl 2
m S RY
10 3
PAGE 72 OF 171
5( p S + pW )sl l 2l B a sin l
m = 0.42 m = 0.36 S
l
: Coefficient taken equal to 0.9 : Side frame span, in m, defined in Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 19, to be taken not less than 0.25D : Coefficient taken equal to:
S = 1.1 S = 1.0
lB
for side frames of holds specified to be empty in BC-A ships for other side frames
: Lower bracket length, in m, defined in Fig 7 : Still water and wave pressures, in kN/m, in intact conditions calculated as defined in [1.3] and [1.4.2].
ps, pw
In addition to the above provision, for side frames of holds intended to carry ballast water in heavy ballast condition, the net section modulus w, in cm3, and the net shear sectional area Ash, in cm2, all along the span of side frames subjected to lateral pressure in holds intended to carry ballast water are to be in accordance with [3.2.3], l being the span of the side frame as defined in Ch.3 Sec.6 [4.2], with consideration to brackets at ends.
3.3.3 Lower bracket of side frame In addition, aAt the level of lower bracket as shown in Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 19, the net section modulus of the frame
and bracket, or integral bracket, with associated shell plating, is to be not less than twice the net section modulus w required for the frame mid-span area obtained from [3.3.1]. In addition, for holds intended to carry ballast water in heavy ballast condition, the net section modulus w, in cm3, at the level of lower bracket is to be not less than twice the greater of the net sections moduli obtained from [3.3.1] and [3.2.3].
PAGE 73 OF 171
The net thickness tLB of the frame lower bracket, in mm, is to be not less than the net thickness of the side frame web plus 1.5 mm. Moreover, the net thickness tLB of the frame lower bracket is to comply with the following formula:
h LB 87 k t LB h LB 73 k t LB
The web depth hLB of lower bracket may be measured from the intersection between the sloped bulkhead of the hopper tank and the side shell plate, perpendicularly to the face plate of the lower bracket (see Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 22). For the 3 side frames located immediately abaft the collision bulkhead, whose scantlings are increased according to [3.3.2], when tLB is greater than 1.73tw, the thickness tLB may be taken as the value tLB obtained from the following formula:
' t LB = t LB t w 2
where tw is the net thickness of the side frame web, in mm, corresponding to Ash determined in accordance to [3.3.1]. The flange outstand is not to exceed 12k0.5 times the net flange thickness.
3.3.4 Upper bracket of side frame In addition, aAt the level of upper bracket as shown in Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 19, the net section modulus of the frame
and bracket, or integral bracket, with associated shell plating, is to be not less than twice the net section modulus w required for the frame mid-span area obtained from [3.3.1]. In addition, for holds intended to carry ballast water in heavy ballast condition, the net section modulus w, in cm3, at the level of upper bracket is not to be less than twice the greater of the net sections moduli obtained from [3.2.3] and [3.3.1]. The net thickness tUB of the frame upper bracket, in mm, is to be not less than the net thickness of the side frame web.
PAGE 74 OF 171
4. Scantlings
4.3 Ordinary stiffeners
4.3.3 The net thickness of the web of ordinary stiffeners, in mm, is to be not less than the greater of:
t = 3.0 + 0.015L2 40% of the net offered required thickness of the attached plating, to be determined according to [4.2] and [5.2].
and is to be less than twice the net offered thickness of the attached plating. The net dimensions of ordinary stiffeners are to comply with the requirement in Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.2.2] and [2.3].
PAGE 75 OF 171
4. Scantlings
4.2 Ordinary stiffeners
4.2.3 The net thickness of the web of ordinary stiffeners, in mm, is to be not less than the greater of:
t = 3.0 + 0.015L2 40% of the net offered required thickness of the attached plating, to be determined according to [4.1].
and is to be less than twice the net offered thickness of the attached plating. The net dimensions of ordinary stiffeners are to comply with the requirement in Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.2.2] and [2.3].
PAGE 76 OF 171
2. SCANTLINGS
2.1. Plating
2.1.1
The net thickness of plating of inner bottom, lower strake of hopper tank sloping plate, and transverse lower stool plating, transverse bulkhead plating and inner hull up to a height of 3.0m above the lowest point of the from inner bottom, excluding bilge wells, is to be taken as the greater of the following values:
2.1.2
The net thickness tGR, in mm, of the inner bottom plating is to be obtained from the following formula:
t GR = 0.28(M GR + 50 ) sk
2.1.3
The net thickness tGR, in mm, within the lower 3 m of hopper tank sloping plate, and of transverse lower stool, transverse bulkhead plating and inner hull up to a height of 3.0m above the lowest point of the inner bottom, excluding bilge wells, is to be obtained from the following formula:
t GR = 0.28(M GR + 42 ) sk
PAGE 77 OF 171
PAGE 78 OF 171
Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-4 (Minimum Scantling, Side Frame and Grab)
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 79 OF 171
Technical Background for the Changes Regarding Scantling Requirement for Ordinary stiffener, Side Frame and Grab
1. Reason for the Rule Change:
1.1 Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.2] The current CSR requires the minimum thickness of webs of ordinary stiffeners is not to be less than 40% of the net offered thickness of the attached plating. However, there are some cases where the thickness of plating is increased due to buckling check of the plating and hull girder strength check and so on. In such cases, the thickness of web of ordinary stiffener is determined by the increased offered thickness of the attached plating and sometimes scantling of the angle type stiffener is remarkable large in order to satisfy with this requirement. This rule change is made to avoid such cases. (KC ID 213).
In addition, the maximum thickness of webs of ordinary stiffeners is mentioned in [2.2.1], although the title of this requirement is minimum thickness requirement. This requirement is based on the consideration of the proportion of thickness between the attached plating and webs of ordinary stiffener. Accordingly, [2.2] will be
modified to be applicable both on minimum and maximum thickness, as follows: Title of [2.2] should be Net thicknesses of webs of ordinary stiffeners Title of [2.2.1] should be Minimum net thicknesses of webs of ordinary stiffeners other than side frames of single side bulk carriers Title of [2.2.2] should be Minimum net thicknesses of side frames of single side bulk carriers New [2.2.3] with the following title: Maximum net thickness of web of ordinary stiffener.
1.2 Ch 6 Sec 2, [3.3.1] This change is made to clarify the requirement by specifying the extent of the span to use and the calculation point for still water and wave pressures (refer to KC ID 216 and 217). It specifies also that the requirements of Ch6. Sec2 [3.2.3] are to be asserted along the whole span of the frames for holds intended to carry ballast water in heavy ballast condition (KC ID 356). 1.3 Ch 6 Sec 2, [3.3.3] This change is made to clarify the requirement by specifying the requirements to be met for side frames lower bracket in holds intended to carry ballast water in heavy ballast condition (KC ID 356). 1.4 Ch 6 Sec 2, [3.3.4] This change is made to clarify the requirement by specifying the requirements to be met for side frames upper bracket in holds intended to carry ballast water in heavy ballast condition (KC ID 356). 1.5 Ch 9 Sec 1, [4.3.3] and Sec 2, [4.2.3] The requirements in Ch 9 Sec 1, [4.3.3] and Sec 2 [4.2.3] are same required in Ch 6 Sec 2, [2.2.1].
PAGE 80 OF 171
1.6 Ch 12 Sec 1, [2.1] This change is made to clarify the requirement by specifying the areas concerned by this calculation (refer to KC ID 313 and 544).
Inner hull up to a height of 3.0m from the lowest point of inner bottom is applied to this requirement.
3. Impact on Scantling
3.1 Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.2.1], [2.2.3], Ch 9 Sec 1, [4.3.3] and Sec 2, [4.2.3]
Regarding the minimum thickness requirement of webs of ordinary stiffeners, the scantling impact depends on the stiffener type used. If the angle type stiffener is used, the scantling is decrease by this change but steel weight decrease is negligible.
3.2 Ch 6 Sec 2 [3.3.1], [3.3.3] and [3.3.4]
There is no change in terms of the steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule change.
3.3 Ch 12 Sec 1, [2.1]
For double side skin bulk carrier having the height of the bilge hopper tanks less than 3.0m or hybrid bulk carrier with cargo hold without hopper tank, it is considered that the thickness of inner hull may be increased by this rule change. However, as there is no CSR ships with such design, the scantling impact cannot be compared that before and after the proposed Rule change.
PAGE 81 OF 171
PAGE 82 OF 171
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 83 OF 171
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-5.
2. Analysis model
2.2 Finite element modeling
2.2.4 When orthotropic elements are not used in FE model:
mesh size is to be equal to or less than the representative spacing of longitudinal stiffeners or transverse side frames stiffeners are to be modeled by using rod and/or beam/bar elements where a double hull is fitted, webs of primary supporting members are to be divided by at least three elements height-wise. However, for transverse primary supporting members inside hopper tank and top side tank, which are less in height than the space between ordinary longitudinal stiffeners, two elements on the height of primary supporting members are accepted.
where no double hull construction is fitted, side shell frames and their end brackets are to be modeled by using shell elements for web and shell/beam/rod elements for face plate. Webs of side shell frames need not be divided along the direction of depth
members at both end sections are to be rigidly linked to independent points at the neutral axis on the centreline as shown in Tab 1. The independent points of both ends are to be fixed as shown in Tab 2.
Table 1: Rigid-link of both ends Translational Dx Dy Dz Rx All longitudinal members RL RL RL RL means rigidly linked to the relevant degrees of freedom of the independent point Nodes on longitudinal members at both ends of the model Rotational Ry Rz -
PAGE 84 OF 171
Table 2: Support condition of the independent point Location of the independent point Dx Fix Translational Dy Dz Fix Fix Fix Fix Rx - Fix Fix Rotational Ry Rz -
Independent point on aft end of model Independent point on fore end of model
3. Analysis criteria
3.2 Yielding strength assessment
3.2.1 Reference stresses Reference stress is Von Mises equivalent stress at the centre of a plane element (shell or membrane) or axial
stress of a line element (bar, beam or rod) obtained by FE analysis through considering hull girder loads according to [2.5.4] or [2.5.5]. Where the effects of openings are not considered in the FE model, the reference stresses in way of the openings are to be properly modified with adjusting shear stresses in proportion to the ratio of web height and opening height. Where elements under assessment are smaller than the standard mesh size specified in [2.2.4] or [2.2.5], the reference stress may be obtained from the averaged stress over the elements within the standard mesh size.
max
where:
li 150
max
: Maximum relative deflection, in mm, obtained by the following formula, and not including secondary deflection between the double bottom and the forward (or afterward) transverse bulkhead, in mm
max = max( B1 , B 2 )
: Length or breadth of the flat part of the double bottom, in mm, whichever is the shorter.
PAGE 85 OF 171
li
B1 B2
li
B2
Figure 3: Definition of relative deflection
B1
PAGE 86 OF 171
1. General
1.1 Application
1.1.1 This Section describes the procedure for the detailed stress assessment with refined meshes to evaluate highly
stressed areas of primary supporting members. Where the global cargo hold analysis of Sec 2 is carried out using a model complying with the modelling criteria of Sec 2, [2.2.4], the areas listed in Tab 1 are to be refined at the locations whose calculated stresses exceed 95% for non-orthotropic elements or 85 % for orthotropic element but do not exceed 100% of the allowable stress as specified in Sec 2, [3.2.3].
PAGE 87 OF 171
PAGE 88 OF 171
Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-5 (Direct Strength Analysis)
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 89 OF 171
Technical Background for the Changes Regarding the Direct Strength Analysis:
1. Reason for the Rule Change:
1.1 Ch 7, Sec 2, [2.2.4] and [3.2.1] In a transverse ring in bilge hopper tank, there are some cases where the web height is smaller than the space between ordinary stiffeners. Where the web is divided by three elements, the element size is relative small. In addition, the element sometimes becomes smaller so that the aspect ratio of element does not exceed 1:4. It is not considered that such smaller elements are appropriate for applying the global strength analysis of cargo hold structures. Therefore this rule change is made to clarify the requirements according to the interpretation in KC ID 149. 1.2 Ch 7, Sec 2, Table 2 The boundary condition in FEA, which restricts rotation along x-axis at fore end of FE model but allow free rotation at aft end, specified in Table 2. However, this boundary condition may cause unexpected warping deformation under beam sea condition because the one end of FE model is rotated about x-axis. It has been noticed that the stress level induced by the warping deformation is sometimes unreasonable severe, especially, in case of smaller bulk carrier as handy size and Panamax BCs. This rule change is an interim solution made to avoid the unexpected rotation in FEA due to this boundary condition. (Refer to KC ID 340). A definitive agreement on boundary conditions has later to be made through further studies that will use same basis in order to make effective comparisons and impact evaluations. 1.3 Ch 7, Sec 2, [3.2.1] Stress level of all elements in FE model should be within the allowable criteria specified in the Rules, in principle. However, the elements having relative small size are often used in FEA. In this case, the averaged stresses among these elements are normally used where deemed reasonable by the Society. This change is made to clarify the requirements for such a case.(Refer to KC ID 340) 1.4 Ch 7, Sec 2, [3.4] The maximum relative deflection is not clear in the current text. In order to clarify the relative deflection, which does not include the deflection of ordinary stiffeners, the editorial correction is made and new figure which gives a definition of the deflection of the outer bottom plate is added. 1.5 Ch 7, Sec 3, [1.1.1] This rule change is made to clarify the requirement for the application of the detailed stress assessment. (Refer to KC ID 341)
PAGE 90 OF 171
3. Impact on Scantling
3.1 Impact on scantling due to the change in Ch 7, Sec 2, [2.2.4], [3.2.1], [3.4] and Sec 3, [1.1] As these rule changes specified in 2.1, 2.3, 2.4 and 2.5 above are made for the clarification, there is no scantling impact due to these changes. 3.2 Impact on scantling due to the changes in Ch 7, Sec 2, Table 2 regarding the correction of the boundary conditions The cargo hold FEA using the boundary condition specified in the current text gives too unreasonable stress in cross deck. Due to the unreasonable stresses, the required thickness for cross deck may be than that for upper deck plating. For example, the required thickness for cross deck is 22.5mm (AH32) and 15mm (AH32) for upper deck according to KC ID 343. From the engineering point of view, this result caused by the boundary condition which gives unrealistic warping effect in FE model obviously. Therefore, the scantling impact due to this change is not carried out. However, the unreasonable and excessive stresses around the hatch opening and in cross deck are improved drastically by this modification. The details of the effect due to the modification of the boundary condition are mentioned in Annex 1.
PAGE 91 OF 171
Annex 1: Details of the effect due to the modification of the boundary conditions
1. FE Analysis and results In order t to examine the effect due to the modification of the boundary condition regarding the rotational restriction Rx along x-axe, the FE analysis for one Handy max buck carrier is carried out as a typical example. Applied boundary condition is given in Table 1-1. Table 1-1 Applied boundary condition Boundary condition as per CSR
Dx Fix Translational Dy Fx Fix Translational Dy Fx Fix Dz Fix Fix Rx Fix Rotational Ry Rotational Ry Rz -
(1) Case-1
(2) Case-2
Applied loading condition and load case are full load homogeneous condition and EDW P1. As the effect due to the boundary condition is mainly appeared in the stresses of structures around the hatch opening and cross deck under beam sea condition, the calculated stresses in cross deck and deformations for full load condition under beam sea (P1) as a typical example. The sampling point of the stress of cross deck is shown in Fig. 1-1.
P
6 7
4 5
1 2
9 10
12 13
14 15
C.L
11
16
PAGE 92 OF 171
The stresses of the sampling points for case 1 and case 2 are shown in Table 1-2. The stress level in cross deck is given in Figure 1-2 and the deformation of the FE model is given in Fig. 1-3.
Table 1-2 Stresses at the sampling points in Cross Deck in full load condition under beam sea (P1)
allowable ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (N/mm2) 326 235 235 326 235 326 235 235
e (N/mm2) Case-1 Case-2 (CSR) (Modified) 41 229 103 145 165 137 145 109 195 168 246 94 167 112 144 153
allowable ID 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (N/mm2) 326 235 235 326 235 326 235 235
e (N/mm2) Case-1 Case-2 (CSR) (Modified) 439 224 213 141 153 134 201 132 249 174 108 68 103 91 205 150
PAGE 93 OF 171
NG
(1) Case -1
(1) Case 1
(2) Case 2
Fig. 1-2 Stress level in the cross deck in full load condition under beam sea (P1)
PAGE 94 OF 171
(1) Case 1
(2) Case 2 Fig. 1-3 Deformation for FE model at the full load condition under beam sea (P1)
PAGE 95 OF 171
2. Conclusion According to Fig 1-3(1), the deformation of FE model is warped unreasonably due to the boundary condition that is the aft end of FE model is free. Hence, the stress distribution in cross deck forward the mid hold of FE model is different from that of afterward the mid hold and the stress value in cross deck seems to be excessive as shown in Fig 1-2(1) and Table 1-1. On the other hand, the deformation of FE model for case 2 is not observed the unreasonable warp because the rotational restriction of both ends of FE model is applied, as shown in Fig 13(2). Hence, the stress distribution in forward cross deck forward the mid hold of FE model is similar to that afterward the mid hold and excessive stress values are not appeared in cross deck as shown in Fig. 1-2(2) and Table 1-1.
Then, it is concluded that (1) The boundary in current text gives excessive and unreasonable results. (2) The corrected boundary condition does not give excessive and unreasonable results. In order to evaluate the FEA results properly, the incorrect boundary condition should be revised to avoid the unreasonable warping deformation in FE model.
PAGE 96 OF 171
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
PAGE 97 OF 171
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-6.
exposed deck but not applied for fatigue strength assessment. If a breakwater is fitted on the exposed deck, no reduction in the external pressures defined in [2.2] and [2.3] is allowed for the area of the exposed deck located aft of the breakwater.
PAGE 98 OF 171
pBS = L g ( zTOP z )
If the pBS is negative, pBS is to be taken equal to 0. Where the considered load point is located in the fuel oil, other oils or fresh water tanks, liquids are assumed to be fulfilled up to the half height of the tanks and zTOP is taken to the Z coordinate of the liquid surface at the upright condition
PAGE 99 OF 171
1. General
1.3 Subject members
1.3.1 Fatigue strength is to be assessed, in cargo hold area, for members described in Tab 1, at the considered
locations.
Table 1: Members and locations subjected to fatigue strength assessment Members Details
Inner bottom plating Inner side plating Transverse bulkhead Hold frames of single side bulk carriers Ordinary stiffeners in double side space Ordinary stiffeners in upper and lower wing tank Ordinary stiffeners in double bottom Hatch corners
Connection with sloping and /or vertical plate of lower stool Connection with sloping plate of hopper tank Connection with sloping plate of hopper tank Connection with sloping plate of lower stool Connection with sloping plate of upper stool Connection to the upper and lower wing tank Connection of longitudinal stiffeners with web frames and transverse bulkhead Connection of transverse stiffeners with stringer or similar Connection of longitudinal stiffeners with web frames and transverse bulkhead Connection of longitudinal stiffeners with floors and floors in way of lower stool or transverse bulkhead Free edges of hatch corners
3. Loading
3.1 Loading condition
3.1.1 The loading conditions to be considered are defined in Tab 2 depending on the ship type. The standard loading
-----
1. General
1.1 Application
1.1.1 Hot spot stress ranges and structural hot spot mean stresses of longitudinal stiffeners are to be assessed in line
the face plate of the longitudinal considering the type of longitudinal end connection and the following locations. (1) Transverse webs or floors other than those at transverse bulkhead of cargo hold or in way of stools, such that additional hot spot stress due to the relative displacement may not be considered. These longitudinal end connections are defined in Tab 1. When transverse webs or floors are watertight, the coefficients Kgl and Kgh as defined in Tab 2 are to be considered instead of those defined in Tab 1 (2) Transverse webs or floors at transverse bulkhead of cargo hold in way of stools, such that additional hot spot stress due to the relative displacement should be considered. These longitudinal end connections are defined in Tab 2. When transverse webs or floors at transverse bulkhead of cargo hold or in way of stools are not watertight, the coefficients Kgl and Kgh as defined in Tab 1 are to be considered instead of those defined in Tab 2.
) (
where
GW , i1(k), GW , i2(k) : Stress due to hull girder moment, defined in [2.3.2] W1 , i1(k), W1 , i2(k) : Stress LW ,i j(k) , CW ,i j (k) and LCW , i j (k) due to hydrodynamic or inertial pressure when the
pressure is applied on the same side as the ordinary stiffener depending on the considered case
W2 , i1(k), W2 , i2(k) : Stress LW , i j(k) , CW , i j (k) and LCW , i j (k) due to hydrodynamic or inertial pressure when the
pressure is applied on the side opposite to the stiffener depending on the considered case
LW , i1(k), LW , i2(k) : Stresses due to wave pressure, defined in [2.3.3] CW , i1(k), CW , i2(k) : Stresses due to liquid pressure, defined in [2.3.4] LCW , i1(k), LCW , i2(k) : Stresses due to dry bulk cargo pressure, defined in [2.3.5]
PAGE 102 OF 171
d , i1(k), d , i2(k)
: Stress due to relative displacement of transverse bulkhead or floor in way of stools, defined in [2.3.6].
2.3.2 Stress due to hull girder moments The hull girder hot spot stress, in N/mm2, in load case i1 and i2 for loading condition (k) is to be obtained
GW , i j ( k ) = K gh (CWV , i j WV , i j CWH , i j WH , ( k ) )
( j = 1, 2)
where: Kgh : Geometrical stress concentration factor for nominal hull girder stress depending on the detail of end connection as defined in Tab 1. Kgh is given in Tab 1 and Tab 2 for the longitudinal end connection specified in [1.1.2](1) and [1.1.2](2), respectively. The stress concentration factor can be evaluated directly by the FE analysis. CWV , i1 , CWV , i2 , CWH , i1 , CWH , i2 : Load combination factors for each load case defined in Ch 4, Sec 4, [2.2]
WV , i1 , WV , i2 , WH , (k)
2.3.3 Stress due to wave pressure The hot spot stress, in N/mm2, due to the wave pressure in load case i1 and i2 for loading condition (k) is
LW , i j ( k )
6x f 6x f 2 K gl K s C NE , i j ( k ) pW , i j ( k ) sl 2 1 + 2 l l 3 10 = 12w 6x f 6x f 2 K gl K s pCW , i j ( k ) sl 1 + 2 l l = 12 w
2
( j = 1, 2)
LW , i j ( k )
10 3
( j = 1, 2)
2C NE , i1( k ) pW , i1( k ) ; C NE , i1( k ) < 0.5 pCW , i1( k ) = ; C NE , i1( k ) 0.5 pW , i1( k ) ; 0 pCW , i 2( k ) = (2C NE , i 2( k ) 1) pW , i 2( k ) C NE , i 2( k ) < 0.5 ; C NE , i 2( k ) 0.5
where: pW , i j(k) : Hydrodynamic pressure, in kN/m2, specified in Ch 4, Sec 5, [1.3], [1.4] and [1.5] , with fp = 0.5, in load case i1 and i2 for loading condition (k). When the location of the considered member is above the waterline, the hydrodynamic pressure is to be taken as the pressure at waterline. Kgl : Geometrical stress concentration factor for stress due to lateral pressure depending on the detail of end connection as defined in Tab 1. Kgl is given in Tab. 1 and Tab. 2 for the longitudinal end connection specified in [1.1.2] (1) and [1.1.2] (2), respectively The stress concentration factor can be evaluated directly by the FE analysis when the detail of end connection is not defined in Tab 1.
a,b
: Eccentricity, in mm, of the face plate as defined in Fig 1. For angle profile, b is to be taken as half the net actual thickness of the web.
tf, bf
wa , wb : Net section modulus in A and B respectively(see Fig.1), in cm3, of the stiffener about the neutral axis parallel to Z axis without attached plating. CNE , i j(k) : Correction factor for the non linearity of the wave pressure range in load case i1 and i2 of loading condition (k)
pW , i j ( k ), WL z TLC ( k ) + g exp pW , i j ( k ), WL = ( ln 0.5)12.5 g 1.0
2.5
C NE , i j ( k )
for for
z > TLC ( k )
pW , i j ( k ), WL
z TLC ( k )
pW , i j ( k ), WL
TLC(k) z s
l
pW , i j(k) , WL : Hydrodynamic pressure, in kN/m2, at water line in load case i1 and i2 of loading condition (k) : Z co-ordinate, in m, of the point considered : Stiffener spacing, in m : Span, in m, to be measured as shown in Fig 2. The ends of the span are to be taken at points where the depth of the end bracket, measured from the face plate of the stiffener is equal to half the depth of the stiffener. xf w : Distance, in m, to the hot spot from the closest end of the span l (see Fig 2) : Net section modulus, in cm3, of the considered stiffener. The section modulus w is to be calculated considering an effective breadth se, in m, of attached plating obtained from the following formulae:
l 1 1 / 3 for 0.67 s sin 2s 6 se = 0.67 s for
l 6 s 1 1/ 3 l 6 > s 1 1/ 3
Z bf b tf B a A tw hw tp
O
bp
Figure 1: Sectional parameters of a stiffener
l
Trans. hot spot d/2 Trans.
d/2 d
xf
2.3.4 Stress due to liquid pressure The hot spot stress, in N/mm2, due to the liquid pressure in load case i1 and i2 for loading condition (k) is
CW , i j ( k )
where:
10 3
( j = 1, 2)
pBW , i j(k) : Inertial pressure, in kN/m2, due to liquid specified in Ch 4, Sec 6, [2.2], with fp = 0.5, in load case i1 and i2 for loading condition (k). Where the considered location is located in fuel oil, other oil or fresh water tanks, no inertial pressure is considered for the tank top longitudinals and when the location of the considered member is above the liquid surface in static and upright condition, the inertial pressure is to be taken at the liquid surface line. CNI , i j(k) : Correction factor for the non linearity of the inertial pressure range due to liquid in load case i1 and i2 for loading condition (k)
p BW , i j ( k ), SF z z SF + g exp p = BW , i j ( k ), SF ( ln 0.5)1 2.5 g 1.0
2.5
C NI , i j ( k )
for
for
z > z SF
p BW , i j ( k ), SF
z z SF
p BW , i j ( k ), SF
zSF
: Z co-ordinate, in m, of the liquid surface. In general, it is taken equal to ztop defined in Ch 4 Sec 6. If the considered location is located in fuel oil, other oil or fresh water tanks, it may be taken as the distance to the half height of the tank. In general, it is taken as the distance to the top of the tank. In case of fuel oil tank, it may be taken as the distance to the half height of the tank
pBW , i j(k) , SF : Inertial pressure due to liquid, in kN/m2, taken at the liquid surface in load case i1 and i2 for loading condition (k). In calculating the inertial pressure according to Ch 4 Sec 6, [2.2.1], x and y coordinates of the reference point are to be taken as liquid surface instead of tank top. Kgl, Ks : the stress concentration factor defined in [2.3.3]
2.3.6 Stress due to relative displacement of transverse bulkhead or floor in way of transverse bulkhead or stool For longitudinal end connection specified in [1.1.2] (2), tThe additional hot spot stress, in N/mm2, due to the
relative displacement in the transverse direction perpendicular to the attached plate between the transverse bulkhead or floor in way of stools and the adjacent transverse web or floor in load case i1 and i2 for loading condition (k) is to be obtained from the following formula.
K dF a dF a , i j ( k ) + K dA a dA a , i j ( k ) K dF f dF f , i j ( k ) + K dA f dA f , i j ( k )
d , i j(k ) =
where: a,f
( j = 1, 2)
: Suffix which denotes the direction, forward (F) and afterward (A), of the transverse web or floor where the relative displacement is occurred as indicated in Tab 12.(see Fig 3) : Additional stress at point a and f , in N/mm2, due to the
relative displacement between the transverse bulkhead or floors in way of stools and the forward (F) and afterward (A) transverse web or floor respectively in load case i1 and i2 for loading condition (k)
1 1.15 x fA w A l F (l A I F + l F I A ) lA
3.9 F , i j ( k ) EI A I F
dF a , i j ( k ) =
10 5 0.9 A, i j ( k ) EI A x fA wAl A3 10 5 10 5
dAa , i j ( k ) =
3.9 A, i j ( k ) EI A I F
dF f , i j ( k ) =
0.9 F , i j ( k ) EI F x fF wF l F 3
dA f , i j ( k ) =
10 5
F , i j(k) , A , i j(k)
: Relative displacement, in mm, in the transverse direction perpendicular to the attached plate
between the transverse bulkhead or floor in way of stools and the forward (F) and afterward (A) transverse web or floor in load case i1 and i2 for loading condition (k) (see Fig 3) (a) For longitudinals penetrating floors in way of stools Relative displacement is defined as the displacement of the longitudinal in relation to the line passing through the stiffener end connection at the base of the stool measured at the first floor forward (F) or afterward (A) of the stool. (b) For longitudinals other than (a) Relative displacement is defined as the displacement of the longitudinal in relation to its original position measured at the first forward (F) or afterward (A) of the transverse bulkhead. Where the stress of the face of longitudinal at the assessment point due to relative displacement is tension, the sign of the relative displacement is positive. IF , IA : Net moment of inertia, in cm4, of forward (F) and afterward (A) longitudinal
KdF-a , KdA-a , KdF-f , KdA-f : Stress concentration factor for stiffener end connection at point a and f subject to relative displacement between the transverse bulkhead and the forward (F) and afterward (A) transverse web or floors in way of stool respectively as defined in Tab 12. The stress concentration can be evaluated directly by the FE analysis when the detail of end connection is not defined in Tab 12.
lF , lA : Span, in m, of forward (F) and afterward (A) longitudinal to be measured as shown in Fig 2
xfF , xfA : Distance, in m, to the hot spot from the closest end of lF and lA respectively (see Fig 2).
Fore
Trans.
T.BHD
Trans.
Aft IA IF
Fore
A lA
Trans.
F lF
Trans.
T. BHD
Figure 3 Relative displacement between the transverse bulkhead and the transverse web or floor Definition of the relative displacement (Example of the side longitudinal)
mean, ( k ) = GS , ( k ) + S1, ( k ) S 2, ( k ) + dS , ( k )
where
GS , (k) : Stress due to still water hull girder moment, defined in [3.3.2] S1 , (k) : Stress due to static pressure when the pressure is applied on the same side as the ordinary stiffener
depending on the considered case, with consideration of the stresses defined in [3.3.3] to [3.3.5]
S2 , (k) : Stress due to static pressure when the pressure is applied on the side opposite to the stiffener
depending on the considered case, with consideration of the stresses defined in [3.3.3] to [3.3.5]
LS , (k) : Stress due to hydrostatic pressure, defined in [3.3.3] CS , (k) : Stress due to liquid pressure in still water, defined in [3.3.4] LCS , (k) : Stress due to dry bulk cargo pressure in still water, defined in [3.3.5] dS , (k) : Stress due to relative displacement of transverse bulkhead in still water, defined in [3.3.6].
3.3.2 Stress due to still water hull girder moment The hot spot stress due to still water bending moment, in N/mm2, in loading condition (k) is to be obtained
GS , ( k ) = K gh
where: MS , (k)
M S , ( k ) (z N ) IY
10 3
3.3.3 Stress due to hydrostatic and hydrodynamic pressure The hot spot stress due to hydrostatic and hydrodynamic pressure, in N/mm2, in loading condition (k) is to be
LS , ( k )
10 3
LS , ( k )
where: pS , (k)
2 pCW , i 1( k ) + pCW , i 2 ( k ) 2 6 x f 6 x f 1 K gl K s p S , ( k ) + + 2 sl 2 l l = 12 w
10 3
pCW , i j(k): Corrected hydrodynamic pressure, in kN/m2, according to [2.3.3], with fp = 0.5, in load case i1 and i2 for loading condition (k) i : Suffix which denotes the load case specified in Sec 2 [2.1.1], when calculating the mean stress, "I" is to be used.
3.3.4 Stress due to liquid pressure in still water The structural hot spot mean stress due to liquid pressure, in N/mm2, in loading condition (k) is to be obtained
CS, ( k )
where: pCS ,(k) : Liquid pressure in still water, in kN/m2, in loading condition (k) specified in Ch 4, Sec 6, [2.1]. Where the considered location is located in fuel oil, other oil or fresh water tanks, dAP and PPV defined in Ch 4 Sec 6 are to be taken equal to 0 and zTOP specified in Ch 4 Sec 6, [2.1] is to be taken equal to zSF specified in [2.3.4].
Table 1: Stress concentration factors for the stiffener end connection Structural type Assessed point Collar plate Bracket size Stress concentration factors Kgl Kgh KdF KdA
1 watertight A nonwatertight F 2 watertight A nonwatertight F 3 watertight a nonwatertight f 4 a watertight watertight watertight watertight ----1.65 1.1 ------------1.5 1.1 1.15 1.5
----dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d
1.1 1.45 1.4 1.55 1.5 1.1 1.05 1.4 1.35 1.5 1.45 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.1 1.05 1.3 1.3 1.35 1.35
1.05 1.1 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.1 1.05
1.55 1.15 1.15 --------1.15 1.1 1.1 1.05 --------1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.35 1.3 --------1.05 1.05 1.55 1.5 ---------
1.05 1.4 1.35 --------1.1 1.05 1.35 1.3 --------1.05 1.05 1.25 1.2 1.05 1.05 --------1.2 1.15 1.1 1.05 ---------
watertight f nonwatertight
Table 1: Stress concentration factors for the stiffener end connection (continued) Structural type Assessed point Collar plate Bracket size Stress concentration factors Kgl Kgh KdF KdA
6 watertight a nonwatertight f 7 watertight a nonwatertight f 8 watertight a nonwatertight f 9 a watertight watertight watertight watertight
dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d
1.1 1.05 1.15 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.15 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05
1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05
1.05 1.05 --------1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05 --------1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 --------1.1 1.05
1.1 1.05 --------1.05 1.05 1.2 1.15 --------1.05 1.05 1.15 1.1 --------1.05 1.05
-----
1.4
1.05
1.05
1.75
f 10 a
watertight
-----
1.6
1.05
1.7
1.05
watertight
-----
1.3
1.05
1.05
1.75
watertight
-----
1.55
1.05
1.3
1.05
Table 1: Stress concentration factors for the stiffener end connection (continued) Structural type Assessed point Collar plate Bracket size Stress concentration factors Kgl Kgh KdF KdA
f 12 a
watertight
-----
1.75
1.05
1.4
1.05
watertight
-----
1.1
1.05
1.05
1.2
f 13 a
watertight
-----
1.3
1.05
1.05
1.05
watertight
-----
1.05
1.05
1.05
1.15
f 14 a
watertight
-----
1.95
1.05
1.55
1.05
watertight
-----
1.05
1.05
1.05
1.15
watertight
-----
1.7
1.05
1.15
1.05
Table 1: Stress concentration factors for non-watertight longitudinal end connection at transverse webs or floors other than transverse bulkheads or floors in way of stools Bracket type Assessed point Bracket size Stress concentration factors Kgl Kgh
1
A F
a ----1.65 1.1
2
A F
a 1.5dw d 1.5 1.05 dw d < 1.5dw 1.55 1.1
3
A F
a 1.5dw d 1.45 1.05 dw d < 1.5dw 1.5 1.1
4
A F
f 1.5dw d 1.4 1.05 dw d < 1.5dw 1.4 1.1
5
A F
f 1.5dw d 1.35 1.05 dw d < 1.5dw 1.35 1.1
6
A F
a 1.5dw d 1.1 1.05 dw d < 1.5dw 1.15 1.05
Table 1: Stress concentration factors for non-watertight longitudinal end connection at transverse webs or floors other than transverse bulkheads or floors in way of stools (continued) Bracket type Assessed point Bracket size Stress concentration factors Kgl Kgh
7
A F
a
dw d < 1.5dw
1.15
1.05
1.5dw d
1.1
1.05
8
A F
a 1.5dw d 1.05 1.05 dw d < 1.5dw 1.1 1.1
9
Tripping bracket
F
a d 2h 1.45 1.1
10
Tripping bracket
F
a d 2.5h 1.35 1.1
11
Tripping bracket
a d1 2h and h d2
1.15
1.1
1.85
1.1
12
Tripping bracket
d1 2.5h and h d2
1.15
1.1
1.35
1.1
13
Tripping bracket
a d1 2h and h d2
1.1
1.1
2.05
1.1
14
Tripping bracket
d1 2.5h and h d2
1.1
1.1
1.8
1.1
Table 2: Stress concentration factors for watertight longitudinal end connection at transverse bulkheads and floors in way of stools Bracket type Assessed point Bracket size Stress concentration factors Kgl Kgh KdF KdA
1
A F
-----
1.5
1.1
1.15
1.5
1.1
1.05
1.55
1.05
2
A F
1.45 1.4 1.1 1.05 1.4 1.35 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.3 1.3 1.1 1.05 1.3 1.3 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05
1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05
1.15 1.15 1.15 1.1 1.1 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.35 1.3 1.05 1.05 1.55 1.5 1.05 1.05 1.1 1.05
1.4 1.35 1.1 1.05 1.35 1.3 1.05 1.05 1.25 1.2 1.05 1.05 1.2 1.15 1.1 1.05 1.1 1.05 1.05 1.05
dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d
3
A F
dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d
4
A F
dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d
5
A F
6
A F
Table 2: Stress concentration factors for watertight longitudinal end connection at transverse bulkheads and floors in way of stools (continued) Bracket type Assessed point Bracket size Kgl Stress concentration factors Kgh KdF KdA
7
A F
dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d
8
A F
dw d<1.5dw 1.5dw d
9
Tripping bracket
a d 2h f
1.4
1.05
1.05
1.75
1.6
1.05
1.7
1.05
10
Tripping bracket
a d 2.5h f
1.3
1.05
1.05
1.75
1.55
1.05
1.3
1.05
11
Tripping bracket
d1 2h and h d2
1.1
1.05
1.05
1.2
1.75
1.05
1.4
1.05
12
Tripping bracket
d1 2.5h and h d2
1.1
1.05
1.05
1.2
1.3
1.05
1.05
1.05
13
Tripping bracket
d1 2h and h d2
1.05
1.05
1.05
1.15
1.95
1.05
1.55
1.05
14
Tripping bracket
d1 2.5h and h d2
1.05
1.05
1.05
1.15
1.7
1.05
1.15
1.05
Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-6 (Fatigue Check for Longitudinals)
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
Technical Background for the Changes Regarding Fatigue Check for Longitudinals
1. Reason for the Rule Change in:
1.1 Chapter 4, Section 5, [2.1.1] Since the external pressures on exposed deck are set up in order to check the local scantling considering the effect on green water and are not referenced in the pressures specified in Ch 8 Sec 4, [2.3.3], the clarification is made that these pressures are not necessary to consider for the fatigue check. 1.2 Chapter 4, Section 6, [2.1.3] For fatigue strength assessment, the filling height of liquid in the tank is to consider the average one because the fatigue strength of the structures is dominant to the most frequent condition in the representative loading condition. Generally, for water ballast tanks, the most frequent condition is assumed that the upper surface of liquid matches to upper level of the tank according to KC ID 359. 1.3 Chapter 8, Section 1, Table 1 and [3.1.1] These changes are made in order to clarify the requirements. 1.4 Chapter 8, Section 4, [2.3.3] and [3.3.3] To consider the nonlinear relation between wave pressure and wave height, the correction factor of the pressure range is specified in Ch8 Sec4 [2.3.3] of the current CSR. This correction factor is introduced to define an equivalent linear long term distribution of stress range which gives a fatigue damage equivalent to the damage according to the nonlinear distribution of stress range. However, the consideration of this nonlinearity on the evaluation of mean stress was not included. This consideration is naturally necessary to consider the nonlinear effect of wave pressure on the fatigue damage of side longitudinals. Consequently, Ch8 Sec4 [2.3.3] is to be modified so that this consideration can be taken into account. And Ch8 Sec4 [3.3.3] is also to be modified so that the mean stress considering the nonlinear effect can be evaluated. 1.5 Chapter 8, Section 4, [2.3.4] and [3.3.4] The interpretation is added to the text for the case where the considered locations are located in fuel oil tank, other oil tank or fresh water tank, according to KC ID 359. 1.6 Chapter 8, Section 4, [2.3.6] The clarification is made for the relative displacement according to the answer in KC ID 342. 1.7 Chapter 8, Section 4, Table 1 The table gives the stress concentration factors for representative stiffener end connections. However, some types of stiffener end connection not defined in the table are used for non watertight transverses and size of bracket was not defined in the table. The modification of the table is made to clarify the application of the types of stiffener end connections and the size of bracket based on the investigation result of actual ship design, according to KC IDs 255, 256, 257, 258 and 259.
2.2 Chapter 4, Section 6, [2.1.3] The new paragraph [2.1.3] regarding the liquid pressure in still water is added. 2.3 Chapter 8, Section 1, Table 1 and [3.1.1] The word floors in way of lower stool is added to the details for ordinary stiffener in double bottom in Table 1 and the sentence regarding standard loading condition for fatigue strength assessment is added to [3.1.1]. 2.4 Chapter 8, Section 4, [2.3.3] and [3.3.3] In order to consider the nonlinearity on the evaluation of mean stress, the formulae are modified as follows. (1) [2.3.3] 6x f 6x f 2 2 K gl K s C NE , i j ( k ) pW , i j ( k ) sl 1 + 2 l l 3 10 ( j = 1, 2) LW , i j ( k ) = 12w 6x f 6x f 2 K gl K s pCW , i j ( k ) sl 1 + 2 l l = 12 w
2
LW , i j ( k )
10 3
( j = 1, 2)
2C NE ,i1( k ) pW ,i1( k ) ; C NE ,i1( k ) < 0.5 pCW ,i1( k ) = ; C NE ,i1( k ) 0.5 pW ,i1( k ) 0 pCW ,i 2 ( k ) = (2C NE ,i 2( k ) 1) pW ,i 2( k ) (2) [3.3.3]
6x f 6x f 2 + 2 K gl K s p S , ( k ) sl 2 1 l l = 12 w
LS , ( k )
10 3
LS , ( k )
10 3
In addition, the texts referring to Table 1 and Table 2 are changed according to the modification of these tables. The background of these formulae is given in Annex 1.
2.5 Chapter 8, Section 4, [2.3.4] and [3.3.4] Where the considered locations are located in fuel oil tank, other oil tank or fresh water tank, ZSF may be taken as the distance to the half height of the tank. In addition, where the hydrostatic pressure of the considered member located in fuel oil tank, other oil tank or fresh water tank is calculated according to Ch 4 Sec 6 [2.1.1], dAP and PPV defined in Ch 4 Sec 6 are to be taken equal to 0. 2.6 Chapter 8, Section 4, [2.3.6] The text on the definition of relative displacement is added.
2.7 Chapter 8, Section 4 Table 1 The current Table 1 is divided into two tables. One is for stress concentration factor for nonwatertight longitudinal end connection and the other is for stress concentration factor for watertight longitudinal connection. In addition, the bracket size is added based on the actual design.
D1 D2 D3 Cape Handymax Handymax 275.48 178.48 178.29 45.00 32.20 31.00 24.30 16.50 16.50 17.80 11.68 11.66 17.80 11.68 11.66 17.80 11.68 11.66 7.59 5.87 6.19 8.67 9.78 7.91 10.56 6.16 6.08
D2
S1 S3 Cape Handymax 275.00 182.85 45.00 32.26 24.40 17.80 17.93 12.45 17.93 12.45 17.93 12.45 8.06 5.02 9.14 8.02 7.00 11.31
D3
S7 Cape 286.91 50.00 24.10 17.88 17.88 17.88 7.01 8.92 10.67
15
15
10
10
10
C urrent M odi ed fi
C urrent M odi ed fi
C urrent M odi ed fi
S1 25
S3 25
S7
20
15
15
10
10
C urrent M odi ed fi
C urrent M odi ed fi
10
C urrent M odi ed fi
For double side skin bulk carrier whose side structure is longitudinal frame system, scantlings of a few side longitudinals located below the load water line are affected by the rule change proposal. For singe side skin bulk carriers, fatigue check result for side longitudinals in top side tank located above load water line are affected by the rule change proposal, however, there is no scantling impact due to the rule change proposal where side longitudinals have the scantlings satisfied with the requirements of Ch 6, Sec 2.
4Technical Background
Technical backgrounds of nonlinear effect on wave pressure and stress concentration factor of longitudinal end connection are described in Annex 1 and Annex 2, respectively.
Fig. 1-1 Correction Factor for Non Linearity of the Wave Pressure Range By multiplying this correction factor by the linear wave pressures for wave crest and wave trough conditions, wave pressure range considering non linear effect can be obtained from the difference of both pressures. In the current rule, because the mean value of the fluctuating pressure is evaluated as the mean of the pressures for wave crest and wave trough conditions, negative pressure will work at the position above water line as shown in Fig. 1-2.
Fig. 1-3 Actual Condition of Fluctuating Non Linear Pressure In order to reflect above mentioned condition of fluctuating nonlinear pressure, the equation specified in Ch 8, Sec 4, [2.3.3] is to be modified as below:
6x f 6x f 2 + 2 K gl K s pCW , i j ( k ) sl 2 1 l l 103 LW , i j ( k ) = 12 w 2C NE , i1( k ) pW , i1( k ) ; C NE , i1( k ) < 0.5 pCW , i1( k ) = ; C NE , i1( k ) 0.5 pW , i1( k ) 0 pCW , i 2( k ) = 2C NE , i 2( k ) 1 pW , i 2( k )
( j = 1, 2)
According to this modification, the evaluated wave induced stress condition of the stiffeners can be illustrated as Fig. 1-4. The magnitude of stress range hold same as the one by current rule. Only the evaluation of mean stress considering the non linearity of the wave pressure has been improved.
45
- 10
-5
10
15
20
Fig. 1-4 Wave induced Stress Condition along Ship Side In order to take the nonlinear fluctuating pressure condition into account in the evaluation of mean stress, the equation specified in Ch 8, Sec 4, [3.3.3] is to be modified as below:
Annex 2: Technical background of stress concentration factors for the stiffeners end connection
SCFs(Stress Concentration Factors) in Table 1 of Ch 8, Sec 4, CSR for Bulker are the ratio of the hot spot stress obtained by the very fine FE analysis to the nominal stress calculated by the simple formulae.
1. FE analysis Considering difference of the stiffener end connection detail, following 2 kinds of hot spot stress are calculated for each detail Nos.1-14. : hot spot stress due to out-of-plane load gl_hotspot : hot spot stress due to forced displacement dF_hotspot, dA_hotspot 1.1 Analysis model The T type longitudinal stiffener with shell penetrating Transverse Bulkhead is considered. According to each detail number in Table 1 of Ch 8, Sec 4, CSR for Bulker, the hot spot stresses (position a and position f) at stiffener end connection are calculated. Fig. 2-1 shows the analysis model and the size of stiffener. Fig. 2-2 shows the stiffener end connection of each detail No.
S 850
ts 18
Moment of inertia I= 99,482 (cm4) Section modulus Z= 2,507 (cm3) Span length l0= 5,000 (mm)
(b) Stiffener shape and size Fig. 2-1 Analysis model and Stiffener details
detail no 1 3 4 5 6 7 8
b/h R1/b 0.4 1.0 0.4 0.4 1.1 1.0 1.0 0.7
c/d
d/h R2/d
0.7 0.7
1.3
1.3
r mm 30 50 50 50 50 50 50
detail no 9 10 11 12 13 14
R2/d
0.75 0.75 0.75 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.9 0.9
1.22 1.22
r(mm) 50 50 50 50 50 50
Fig. 2-2 Stiffener end connection of each detail number 1.2 Loads
a) Out-of-plane loading A certain out-of-plane uniformly distributing load is loaded, which makes the nominal stress of stiffener end connection 200N/mm2 in tension side at l0=5m, xf=0. Fig. 2-3 shows the loading condition of a). Considering the bracket size (shown in Fig. 2-2), the hot spot stress of stiffener end connection, gl_hotspot, is analyzed for each detail No. b) Forced displacement Forced displacement (23.7mm) is added to the position (A) or (E) in Fig. 2-1, which makes also the nominal stress of stiffener end connection 200N/mm2 in tension side at l0=5m, xf=0. Considering the bracket size, the hot spot stresses of stiffener end connection, dF_hotspot, dA_hotspot, are analyzed for each detail No (shown in Fig. 2-2).
1.3 Boundary condition The boundary conditions at each position in each analysis load condition are shown in Table 2-1. In this Table, (a) means out-of-plane loading, and the others mean forced displacement. The position (A) to (E) is shown in Fig. 2-1. Table 2-1 Boundary condition Position
2. Simple beam formulae The beam model shown in Fig. 2-1 and Fig. 2-2 is considered as well as FE analysis, whose nominal stress of the stiffener end connection is set 200N/mm2 in tension side at l0=5m, xf=0 by out-of-plane load or forced displacement. Considering the effect of modified span length (lf) and change of hot spot position by xf specified in Ch 8, Sec 4, CSR for Bulker, following 2 kinds of modified nominal stress are calculated for each detail No.1-14. : modified nominal stress due to out-of-plane load gl_nominal : modified nominal stress due to forced displacement dF_nominal, dA_nominal a) Out-of-plane loading Considering the bracket size (shown in Fig. 2-2), the modified nominal stress, gl_nominal, for each detail No is calculated according to the following equation. 2 2 l f 6x f 6x f gl no min al = 0 1 + 2 ( 0 = 200 N / mm2 , l0 = 5.0m) l l0 l0 0 b) Forced displacement Considering the bracket size (shown in Fig. 2-2), the modified nominal stresses, dF_nominal, dA_nominal, are calculated according to the following equations. The value of relative displacement (F, A) is 23.7mm. x 1.95 F EI 1 1.15 fA 10 5 dF a _ no min al = 2 lf wl f x 0.9 AEI x fA 5 1.95 A EI 1 1.15 fA 10 5 dA a _ no min al = 10 2 3 lf wl f wl f x 0.9 FEI x fA 5 1.95 F EI 1 1.15 fF 10 5 dF a _ no min al = 10 2 3 lf wl f wl f x 1.95 A EI 1 1.15 fF 10 5 dA f _ no min al = 2 lf wl f Usually, the dimension and the length of the stiffener fitted at fore of transverse bulkhead is the same of those fitted at after of transverse bulkhead, but there are some cases where they are different between fore part and after part. Then, taking into account the cases of l f l a and
I A I F in order to generalize to the formula mentioned above, the equations specified in 3.3.6 of Ch 8, Sec 4, CSR for Bulker can be obtained.
3. Results and SCF calculation
Table 2-2 shows the hot spot stress obtained by FE analysis and the modified nominal stress calculated by simple formulae. As the values of SCFs for web stiffener connection depend on the analytical model, boundary condition, definition of hot spot stress, etc., each classification society specifies the different SCFs. In CSR for Bulker, in order to set up the single SCFs, we decided that the SCFs for Kgl_in detail No. 1 to 8 specified in BV rule were used. (See Table 2-2) The other SCFs in detail No. 1 to 8 were obtained by multiplying the ratio (5) in Table 2 by the value calculated by FEA. For SCFs for tripping brackets connections in detail No. 9 to 14, the averaged ratio (5) in Table 2 which is equal to 0.83 was considered. Furthermore, the modified SCFs value obtained by multiplying the SCFs specified in Table 2 by the correction factor is modified by the following manner. (a) Minimum value is set to 1.05 (b) All values are expressed by 0.05 unit Finally, SCFs of each detail No. can be obtained as shown in Table 2-3 whose values are used for Table 1 of Ch 8, Sec 4, CSR for Bulker.
Table 2-3 Stress concentration factor
detail No. 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 point point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' Kgl 1.50 1.10 1.35 1.05 1.05 1.30 1.05 1.30 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 KdF 1.15 1.55 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.30 1.05 1.50 1.05 1.10 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.10 KdA 1.50 1.05 1.30 1.05 1.20 1.05 1.15 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.15 1.05 1.10 1.05 detail No. 9 10 11 12 13 14 point point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' Kgl 1.40 1.60 1.30 1.55 1.10 1.75 1.10 1.30 1.05 1.95 1.05 1.70 KdF 1.05 1.70 1.05 1.30 1.05 1.40 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.55 1.05 1.15 KdA 1.75 1.05 1.75 1.05 1.20 1.05 1.20 1.05 1.15 1.05 1.15 1.05
Detail No. 1 3 4 5 6
PAGE 132 OF 11
point point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f' point 'a' point 'f'
gl_hot (1) 297.7 217.5 299.8 122.6 175.6 275.8 150.5 271.3 184.5 155.3 182.9 129.3 151.0 129.9 311.9 106.5 312.2 42.8 150.6 161.3 152.7 69.2 116.6 159.3 119.0 70.2
gl_nom (2) 184.3 184.3 179.1 129.0 136.5 169.6 123.3 176.7 123.9 123.9 132.1 116.7 119.1 122.6 200.0 55.5 200.0 22.9 113.9 77.4 113.9 44.7 113.7 67.5 113.7 34.9
NKs SCF (3) =(1)/(2) 1.62 1.18 1.67 0.95 1.29 1.63 1.22 1.54 1.49 1.25 1.38 1.11 1.27 1.06 1.56 1.92 1.56 1.87 1.32 2.08 1.34 1.55 1.03 2.36 1.05 2.01
Table 2-2 Stress obtained by FE analysis or simple formulae BVs Ratio Modified SCF Modified SCF dF_hot dF_nom NKs
SCF (4) 1.5 1.35 (5) (6) (7) 167.1 167.1 172.0 158.4 174.6 181.6 163.7 174.3 190.0 186.8 179.7 171.7 168.3 165.0 154.0 119.3 154.0 109.4 186.3 167.7 186.3 153.3 162.4 142.3 162.4 130.3
(=(4)/(3))
SCF (6)/(7) 1.23 1.68 1.30 1.27 1.15 1.63 1.17 1.78 1.19 1.37 1.17 1.20 1.16 1.25 1.29 2.12 1.26 1.55 1.01 1.69 1.03 1.17 1.03 1.88 1.06 1.35 1.14(1.23*0.93) 1.55(1.68*0.93) 1.05(1.30*0.81) 1.02(1.27*0.81) 0.92(1.15*0.80) 1.30(1.63*0.80) 0.99(1.17*0.84) 1.51(1.78*0.84) 0.88(1.19*0.74) 1.01(1.37*0.74) 0.88(1.17*0.76) 0.91(1.20*0.76) 0.96(1.16*0.83) 1.03(1.25*0.83) 1.07(1.29*0.83) 1.76(2.12*0.83) 1.05(1.26*0.83) 1.29(1.55*0.83) 0.84(1.01*0.83) 1.40(1.69*0.83) 0.85(1.03*0.83) 0.97(1.17*0.83) 0.85(1.03*0.83) 1.56(1.88*0.83) 0.88(1.06*0.83) 1.12(1.35*0.83)
dA_hot (8) 270.1 150.3 272.4 170.8 253.6 210.1 214.6 210.0 268.5 208.8 264.0 188.1 219.8 181.3 320.6 135.4 323.0 121.6 263.7 182.0 263.2 147.8 219.0 172.4 219.3 143.8
dA_no
m
(9) 167.1 167.1 172.0 162.3 171.7 181.6 159.4 174.3 186.8 190.0 176.8 176.1 163.9 169.1 154.0 129.2 154.0 122.2 182.0 176.1 182.0 165.8 157.3 151.7 157.3 143.1
NKs SCF (8)/(9) 1.62 0.90 1.58 1.05 1.48 1.16 1.35 1.20 1.44 1.10 1.49 1.07 1.34 1.07 2.08 1.05 2.10 1.00 1.45 1.03 1.45 0.89 1.39 1.14 1.39 1.00
Modified SCF
0.93 0.81
1.50 1.09(1.18*0.93) 1.35 0.77(0.95*0.81) 1.03(1.29*0.80) 1.30 1.03(1.22*0.84) 1.30 1.10 0.93(1.25*0.74) 1.05 0.84(1.11*0.76) 1.05 0.88(1.06*0.83) 1.30(1.56*0.83) 1.60(1.92*0.83) 1.29(1.56*0.83) 1.55(1.87*0.83) 1.10(1.32*0.83) 1.73(2.08*0.83) 1.11(1.34*0.83) 1.29(1.55*0.83) 0.85(1.03*0.83) 1.96(2.36*0.83) 0.87(1.05*0.83) 1.67(2.01*0.83)
205.5 280.5 223.7 200.5 200.2 295.7 190.9 311.0 226.3 255.3 209.9 206.8 194.7 206.0 198.5 253.5 193.8 169.8 189.0 282.7 192.2 178.6 167.9 267.8 172.1 176.1
1.50(1.62*0.93) 0.83(0.90*0.93) 1.28(1.58*0.81) 0.85(1.05*0.81) 1.12(1.40*0.80) 0.93(1.16*0.80) 1.13(1.35*0.84) 1.01(1.20*0.84) 1.07(1.44*0.74) 0.81(1.10*0.74) 1.13(1.49*0.76) 0.81(1.07*0.76) 1.11(1.34*0.83) 0.89(1.07*0.83) 1.73(2.08*0.83) 0.87(1.05*0.83) 1.74(2.10*0.83) 0.83(1.00*0.83) 1.20(1.45*0.83) 0.85(1.03*0.83) 1.20(1.45*0.83) 0.74(0.89*0.83) 1.15(1.39*0.83) 0.95(1.14*0.83) 1.15(1.39*0.83) 0.83(1.00*0.83)
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Note: (1) For detail No. 2, the ratio is taken to 0.93. (2) For detail No. 9-14, the coefficient 0.83 is the average value obtained from the ratios for detail No. 1 to 8.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-7.
1. Corrosion additions
1.2 Corrosion addition determination
1.2.1 Corrosion additions for steel The corrosion addition for each of the two sides of a structural member, tC1 or tC2, is specified in Tab 1.
The total corrosion addition tC, in mm, for both sides of the structural member is obtained by the following formula:
t C = Roundup 0.5 (t C1 + t C 2 ) + t reserve
For an internal member within a given compartment, the total corrosion addition tC is obtained from the following formula:
t C = Roundup 0.5 (2t C1 ) + t reserve
where tC1 is the value specified in Tab 1 for one side exposure to that compartment. When a structural member is affected by more than one value of corrosion addition (e.g. a plate in a dry bulk cargo hold extending above the lower zone), the scantling criteria are generally to be applied considering the severest value of corrosion addition applicable to the member. In addition, the total corrosion addition tC is not to be taken less than 2 mm, except for web and face plate of ordinary stiffeners.
Table 1: Corrosion addition on one side of structural members Corrosion addition, tC1 or tC2 in mm BC-A or BC-B Other ships with L 150 m
Compartment Type
Structural member
Transverse bulkhead
Within 3m below the top of tank (3) Elsewhere Within 3 m below the top of tank (3) Elsewhere Upper part (4) Lower stool: sloping plate, vertical plate and top plate Other parts Upper part
(4)
2.0 1.5 1.7 1.2 2.4 5.2 3.0 1.0 2.6 1.5
Other members
Webs and flanges of the upper end brackets of side frames of single side bulk carriers Webs and flanges of lower brackets of side frames of single side bulk carriers Other parts
1.8
1.0
2.2 2.0
1.2 1.2
Sloped plating of Continuous wooden ceiling 2.0 1.2 hopper tank, inner No continuous wooden ceiling 3.7 2.4 bottom plating Horizontal member and weather deck (5) 1.7 Exposed to atmosphere Non horizontal member 1.0 (7) Exposed to sea water 1.0 Fuel oil tanks and lubricating oil tanks (2) 0.7 Fresh water tanks 0.7 Spaces not normally accessed, e.g. access only Void spaces (6) 0.7 through bolted manholes openings, pipe tunnels, etc. Internal of deck houses, machinery spaces, stores Dry spaces 0.5 spaces, pump rooms, steering spaces, etc. Other compartments than above 0.5 Notes (1) Dry bulk cargo hold includes holds, intended for the carriage of dry bulk cargoes, which may carry water ballast. (2) The corrosion addition of a plating between water ballast and heated fuel oil tanks is to be increased by 0.7 mm. (3) This is only applicable to ballast tanks with weather deck as the tank top .This is not to be applied to structural members of inner bottom and located below inner bottom. (4) Upper part of the cargo holds corresponds to an area above the connection between the top side and the inner hull or side shell. If there is no top side, the upper part corresponds to the upper one third of the cargo hold height. (5) Horizontal member means a member making an angle up to 20 as regard as a horizontal line. (6) The corrosion addition on the outer shell plating in way of pipe tunnel is to be considered as water ballast tank. (7) Outer side shell between normal ballast draught and scantling draught is to be increased by 0.5 mm.
Symbols
: Rule length L, but to be taken not greater than 300 m : Lateral pressure for decks, in kN/m2, as defined in [3.2.1] : Lateral pressure for sides of superstructures, in kN/m2, as defined in [3.2.3] : Material factor, defined in Ch 3, Sec 1, [2.2] : Spacing, in m, of ordinary stiffeners, measured at mid-span along the chord : Span, in m, of ordinary stiffeners, measured between the supporting members, see Ch 3, Sec 6, [4.2] : Corrosion addition, defined in Ch 3, Sec 3 : Coefficient taken equal to: c = 0.75 for beams, girders and transverses which are simply supported on one or both ends c = 0.55 in other cases
tC c
ma
4. Scantlings
4.1 Side plating of non-effective superstructures
4.1.1 The gross thickness, in mm, of the side plating of non-effective superstructures is not to be less than the greater
t = 1.21s kp SI + t C
t = 0.8 kL
t = 1.21s kp SI + 1.5
t = 1.21s kp D + t C
t = 1.21s kp D + 1.5
[4.2.2] may be reduced by tC 1.5mm. However, such deck plating is not to be less than 5 mm. Where a sheathing other than wood is used, attention is to be paid that the sheathing does not affect the steel. The sheathing is to be effectively fitted to the deck.
t = 8s k + 1.5
For weather decks of short deckhouses protected by sheathing and for decks within deckhouses, the gross thickness may be reduced by tC 1.5mm. However, such deck plating is not to be less than 5 mm.
t = 0.9 s kp + 1.5
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract. PAGE 139 OF 171
Table 1 Difference of thickness diminution of structural members in bilge hopper tank . 95 percentile value (mm) Average (mm) (Upper) (Lower) (Upper) (Lower) A (21-years) -0.14 -0.9 B (16-years) -0.20 -0.8 C (8-years) 0.10 0.1 C (16-years) 0.00 0.0 D (12-years) -0.04 -0.4 E (11-years) -0.07 -0.4 F (9-years) 0.00 -0.1 The results in Table 1 show that the thickness diminution of structural members in the upper part of the bilge hopper tank is rather small compared to those in the lower part. Therefore, the note (3) of Table 1 of the Rules should be revised according to this result.
1.2 Ch 9, Sec 4 According to the requirements in Ch 3, Sec 2, [2.1.1] and Ch 9, Sec 4, [1.2.1], the scantlings of structural members in superstructures and deckhouses are gross. However, corrosion additions based on the net scantling approach specified in Ch 3, Sec 1, [2.2] are referred in Symbols and required thickness formula. This was not the intention of these requirements which come from GL rules.
2.2 Ch 9, Sec 4 In all required thickness formulae, tc is changed to the absolute value, i.e., 1.5mm. In addition, the word thickness is changed to gross thickness for clarification.
3. Impact on scantlings
3.1 Note (3) in Table 1 of Ch 3, Sec 3 As the corrosion additions on one side of structural members within 3m below the top of the bilge hopper tank is changed to 1.2mm from 1.7mm, thicknesses of side shell and sloping plate and scantlings of longitudinals and transverses within 3m of the bilge hopper tank are reduced accordingly. 3.2 Ch 9, Sec 4 The gross thicknesses in superstructures and deckhouses are reduced by 0.5mm.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-8.
6. Double bottom
6.4 Floors
6.4.2 Floors in way of transverse bulkheads Where transverse bulkhead is provided with lower stool, solid floors are to be fitted in line with both sides of
lower stool. Where transverse bulkhead is not provided with lower stool, solid floors are to be fitted in line with both flanges of the vertically corrugated transverse bulkhead or in line of plane transverse bulkhead. The net thickness and material properties of the supporting floors and pipe tunnel beams are to be not less than those required for the bulkhead plating or, when a stool is fitted, of the stool side plating.
The main dimensions a, R, c, d, t, and sC of corrugated bulkheads are defined in Fig 28. The bending radius is not to be less than the following values, in mm: R = 3.0t where : t : As-built thickness, in mm, of the corrugated plate. The corrugation angle shown in Fig 28 is to be not less than 55. The thickness of the lower part of corrugations is to be maintained for a distance from the inner bottom (if no lower stool is fitted) or the top of the lower stool not less than 0.15lC. The thickness of the middle part of corrugations is to be maintained for a distance from the deck (if no upper stool is fitted) or the bottom of the upper stool not greater than 0.3lC. The section modulus of the corrugations in the remaining upper part of the bulkhead is to be not less than 75% of that required for the middle part, corrected for different minimum yield stresses. When welds in a direction parallel to the bend axis are provided in the zone of the bend, the welding procedures are to be submitted to the Society for approval.
a tf R c tw d
55 o
sC
Figure 28: Dimensions of a corrugated bulkhead
10.4.5 Structural arrangements The strength continuity of corrugated bulkheads is to be ensured at the ends of corrugations.
Where corrugated bulkheads are cut in way of primary supporting members, attention is to be paid to ensure correct alignment of corrugations on each side of the primary member. Where vertically corrugated transverse bulkheads or longitudinal bulkheads are welded on the inner bottom plate, floors or girders are to be fitted in way of flanges of corrugations, respectively and the net thickness and materials of floors and girders are to be not less than those adjacent corrugation face plate. In general, the first vertical corrugation connected to the boundary structures is to have a width not smaller than typical width of corrugation flange. Where stools are fitted at the lower part of transverse bulkheads, the net thickness of adjacent floors is to be not less than that of the stool plating.
10.4.6 Bulkhead stools Plate diaphragms or web frames are to be fitted in bottom stools in way of the double bottom longitudinal girders
or plate floors, as the case may be. Brackets or deep webs are to be fitted to connect the upper stool to the deck transverse or hatch end beams, as the case may be. The continuity of the corrugated bulkhead with the stool plating is to be adequately ensured. In particular, upper strake of the lower stool is to be of the same net thickness and yield stress as those of the lower strake of the bulkhead.
10.4.7 Lower stool The lower stool, when fitted, is to have a height in general not less than 3 times the depth of the corrugations.
The net thickness and material of the stool top plate are to be not less than those required for the bulkhead plating above. The thickness and material properties of the upper portion of vertical or sloping stool side plating within the depth equal to the corrugation flange width from the stool top are to be not less than the required flange plate thickness and material to meet the bulkhead stiffness requirement at the lower end of the corrugation. The ends of stool side ordinary stiffeners, when fitted in a vertical plane, are to be attached to brackets at the upper and lower ends of the stool. The distance d from the edge of the stool top plate to the surface of the corrugation flange is to be in accordance with Fig 30.
The stool bottom is to be installed in line with double bottom floors or girders as the case may be, and is to have a width not less than 2.5 times the mean depth of the corrugation. The stool is to be fitted with diaphragms in line with the longitudinal double bottom girders or floors as the case may be, for effective support of the corrugated bulkhead. Scallops in the brackets and diaphragms in way of the connections to the stool top plate are to be avoided. Where corrugations are cut at the lower stool, corrugated bulkhead plating is to be connected to the stool top plate by full penetration welds. The stool side plating is to be connected to the stool top plate and the inner bottom plating by either full penetration or deep penetration welds. The supporting floors are to be connected to the inner bottom by either full penetration or deep penetration weld.
Figure 30: Permitted distance, d, from the edge of the stool top plate to the surface of the corrugation flange 10.4.8 Upper stool
The upper stool, when fitted, is to have a height in general between two and three times the depth of corrugations. Rectangular stools are to have a height in general equal to twice the depth of corrugations, measured from the deck level and at the hatch side girder. The upper stool of transverse bulkhead is to be properly supported by deck girders or deep brackets between the adjacent hatch end beams. The width of the upper stool bottom plate is generally to be the same as that of the lower stool top plate. The stool top of non-rectangular stools is to have a width not less than twice the depth of corrugations. The thickness and material of the stool bottom plate are to be the same as those of the bulkhead plating below. The thickness of the lower portion of stool side plating is to be not less than 80% of that required for the upper part of the bulkhead plating where the same material is used. The ends of stool side ordinary stiffeners when fitted in a vertical plane, are to be attached to brackets at the upper and lower end of the stool. The stool is to be fitted with diaphragms in line with and effectively attached to longitudinal deck girders extending to the hatch end coaming girders or transverse deck primary supporting members as the case may be, for effective support of the corrugated bulkhead. Scallops in the brackets and diaphragms in way of the connection to the stool bottom plate are to be avoided.
10.4.9 Alignment At deck, if no upper stool is fitted, two transverse or longitudinal reinforced beams as the case may be, are to be
fitted in line with the corrugation flanges. At bottom, if no lower stool is fitted, the corrugation flanges are to be in line with the supporting floors or girders. The weld of corrugations and floors or girders to the inner bottom plating are to be full penetration ones. The thickness and material properties of the supporting floors or girders are to be not less than those of the corrugation flanges. Moreover, Tthe cut-outs for connections of the inner bottom longitudinals to double bottom floors are to be closed by collar plates. The supporting floors or girders are to be connected to each other by suitably designed shear plates. Stool side plating is to be aligned with the corrugation flanges. Lower stool side vertical stiffeners and their brackets in the stool are to be aligned with the inner bottom structures as longitudinals or similar, to provide appropriate load transmission between these stiffening members. Lower stool side plating is not to be knuckled anywhere between the inner bottom plating and the stool top plate.
10.4.13 Section modulus at the lower end of corrugations
(void) a) The section modulus at the lower end of corrugations (Fig 31 to Fig 35) is to be calculated with the compression flange having an effective flange width bef not larger than that indicated in [10.4.10]. b) Webs not supported by local brackets Except in case e), if the corrugation webs are not supported by local brackets below the stool top plate (or below the inner bottom) in the lower part, the section modulus of the corrugations is to be calculated considering the corrugation webs 30% effective. c) Effective shedder plates Provided that effective shedder plates, as defined in [10.4.11], are fitted (see Figs 31 and 32), when calculating the section modulus of corrugations at the lower end (cross sections 1 in Figs 31 and 32), the area of flange plates may be increased by the value obtained, in cm2, from the following formula:
I SH = 2.5a t f t SH
without being taken greater than 2.5atf, where: a : Width, in m, of the corrugation flange (see Fig 28)
tSH : Net shedder plate thickness, in mm tf : Net flange thickness, in mm. d) Effective gusset plates Provided that effective gusset plates, as defined in [10.4.12], are fitted (see Figs 33 to 35), when calculating the section modulus of corrugations at the lower end (cross-sections 1 in Figs 33 to 35), the area of flange plates may be increased by the value obtained, in cm2, from the following formula:
I G = 7hG t f
where: hG : Height, in m, of gusset plates (see Figs 33 to 35), to be taken not greater than (10/7)SGU
RULE CHANGE NOTICE NO.1-8 SGU : Width, in m, of gusset plates tf e) : Net flange thickness, in mm Sloping stool top plate
If the corrugation webs are welded to a sloping stool top plate which has an angle not less than 45 with the horizontal plane, the section modulus of the corrugations may be calculated considering the corrugation webs fully effective. For angles less than 45, the effectiveness of the web may be obtained by linear interpolation between 30% for 0 and 100% for 45. Where effective gusset plates are fitted, when calculating the section modulus of corrugations the area of flange plates may be increased as specified in d) above. No credit may be given to shedder plates only.
hG
shedder plate
lower stool
shedder plate hG
lower stool
gusset plate
hG
lower stool
gusset plate
hG
lower stool
hG
= = lower stool
10.4.14 Section modulus at sections other than the lower end of corrugations (void)
The section modulus is to be calculated with the corrugation webs considered effective and the compression flange having an effective flange width, bef, not larger than that obtained in [10.4.10].
10.4.15 Shear area
(void) The shear area is to be reduced in order to account for possible non-perpendicularity between the corrugation webs and flanges. In general, the reduced shear area may be obtained by multiplying the web sectional area by (sin ), being the angle between the web and the flange (see Fig 28).
Section 1 PLATING
3. Strength check of plating subjected to lateral pressure
3.2 Plating thickness
3.2.3 Net thickness of the corrugations of transverse vertically corrugated watertight bulkheads separating cargo holds for flooded conditions The net plate thickness t, in mm, of transverse vertically corrugated watertight bulkheads separating cargo holds
p s
: Resultant pressure, in kN/m2, as defined in Ch 4, Sec 6, [3.3.7] : plate width, in m, to be taken equal to the width of the corrugation flange or web, whichever is greater.
For built-up corrugation bulkheads, when the thicknesses of the flange and web are different: the net thickness of the narrower plating is to be not less than that obtained, in mm, from the following formula:
t N = 14.9s 1.05 p ReH
: plate width, in m, of the narrower plating the net thickness of the wider plating is not to be less than the greater of those obtained, in mm, from the following formulae:
tW = 14.9s 1.05 p ReH
tW =
462 s 2 p 2 t NP ReH
where: tNP : Actual net thickness of the narrower plating, in mm, to be not taken greater than:
t NP = 14.9 s 1.05 p ReH
: plate width, in m, to be taken equal to the width of the corrugation flange or web, whichever is greater.
The net thickness of the lower part of corrugations is to be maintained for a distance from the inner bottom (if no lower stool is fitted) or the top of the lower stool not less than 0.15lC, where lC is the span of the corrugations, in m, to be obtained according to Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.4]. The net thickness is also to comply with the requirements in [3.2.1], Sec 2, [3.6.1 & 3.6.2], and Sec 3, [6].
The net thickness of the middle part of corrugations is to be maintained for a distance from the deck (if no upper stool is fitted) or the bottom of the upper stool not greater than 0.3lC. The net thickness is also to comply with the requirements in [3.2.1] and Sec 2, [3.6.1& 3.6.2].
3.2.3 bis1 Net thickness of lower stool and upper stool The net thickness and material of the stool top plate of lower stool are to be not less than those for the corrugated
bulkhead plating above required by [3.2.3]. The net thickness and material of the upper portion of vertical or sloping stool side plating of lower stool within the depth equal to the corrugation flange width from the stool top are to be not less than the flange plate at the lower end of the corrugation required by [3.2.3], as applicable, whichever is the greater. The net thickness and material of the stool bottom plate of upper stool are to be the same as those of the bulkhead plating below required by [3.2.3], as applicable, whichever is the greater. The net thickness of the lower portion of stool side plating is to be not less than 80% of the upper part of the bulkhead plating required by [3.2.3], as applicable, whichever is the greater, where the same material is used. The net thicknesses of lower stool and upper stool are to be not less than those required by [3.2.1], [3.2.2] and [3.2.4].
3.2.3 bis2 Net thickness of supporting floors of corrugated bulkhead The net thickness and material of the supporting floors and pipe tunnel beams of corrugated bulkhead, when no
stool is fitted, are to be not less than those of the corrugation flanges required by [3.2.3] When a lower stool is fitted, the net thickness of supporting floors are to be not less than that of the stool side plating required by the first sentence of [3.2.2].
3.2.4 Testing conditions The plating of compartments or structures as defined in Ch 4, Sec 6, [4] is to be checked in testing conditions. To
this end, its net thickness is to be not less than the value obtained, in mm, from the following formula:
t = 15.8ca cr s pT 1.05RY
(void) Unless otherwise specified, the net section modulus and the net shear sectional area of a corrugation are to be not less than those obtained for an ordinary stiffener with s equal sC, as defined in Fig 2.
a tf R c tw d
55 o
sC
Figure 2: Corrugated bulkhead (void)
3. Yielding check
3.2 Strength criteria for single span ordinary stiffeners other than side frames of single side bulk carriers
3.2.4 Net section modulus of corrugated bulkhead of ballast hold for ships having a length L less than 150m
The net section modulus w, in cm3, of corrugated bulkhead of ballast hold for ships having a length L less than 150m subjected to lateral pressure are to be not less than the values obtained from the following formula:
w=K
( p S + pW )s C l 2
m S RY
10 3
where: K : Coefficient given in Tab 4 and 5, according to the type of end connection. When dH < 2.5d0 , both section modulus per half pitch of corrugated bulkhead and section modulus of lower stool at inner bottom are to be calculated. sC S : Half pitch length, in m, of the corrugation, defined in [2.1.1] Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 28 : Length, in m, between the supports, as indicated in Fig 6 : Coefficient defined in Tab 3.
The effective width of the corrugation flange in compression is to be considered according to Ch3, Sec 6, [10.4.10] when the net section modulus of corrugated bulkhead is calculated.
Supported by girders or welded directly to decks or inner bottoms Welded to stool efficiently supported by ship structure
0.83 1.25
1.25 1.00
1.25 0.83
Upper end support Supported by girders Welded directly to deck Welded to stool efficiently supported by ship structure
1.25
1.00
Table 5: Values of K, in case d H < 2.5d 0
0.83
Upper end support Section modulus of corrugated bulkhead Section modulus of stool at bottom
Supported by girders
Connected to deck
Connected to stool
0.83 0.83
0.71 1.25
0.65 1.13
0.83 0.83
0.71 1.25
0.65 1.13
d H 2.5d 0
d H < 2.5d 0
B A e A
B e
d0
d0
dH
e = A(1 d 0 / 2 B )
dH
Figure 6: Measurement of l
3.2.6 Bending capacity and shear capacity of the corrugations of transverse vertically corrugated watertight bulkheads separating cargo holds for flooded conditions (void) The bending capacity and the shear capacity of the corrugations of watertight bulkheads between separating
ReH 2
where: M : Bending moment in a corrugation, to be obtained, in kN.m, from the following formula: M = FlC / 8 F : Resultant force, in kN, to be calculated according to Ch 4, Sec 6, [3.3.7]
lC : Span of the corrugations, in m, to be obtained according to Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.4]
WLE : Net section modulus, in cm3, of one half pitch corrugation, to be calculated at the lower end of the corrugations according to Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.13], without being taken greater than the value obtained from the following formula:
2 Q hG 0.5hG sC pG 3 10 WLE , M = WG + ReH
WG : Net section modulus, in cm3, of one half pitch corrugation, to be calculated in way of the upper end of shedder or gusset plates, as applicable, according to Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.1413] Q : Shear force in a corrugation, to be obtained, in kN, from the following formula: Q = 0.8F hG : Height, in m, of shedders or gusset plates, as applicable (see Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 31 to Fig 35) pG : Resultant pressure, in kN/m2, to be calculated in way of the middle of the shedders or gusset plates, as applicable, according to Ch 4, Sec 6, [3.3.7] sC : Spacing of the corrugations, in m, to be taken according to Fig 2 WM : Net section modulus, in cm3, of one half pitch corrugation, to be calculated at the mid-span of corrugations according to Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.14], without being taken greater than 1.15WLE : Shear stress in the corrugation, in N/mm2, to be obtained from the following formula:
= 10
Q Ash
The net section modulus w, in cm3, and the net shear sectional area Ash, in cm2, of single span ordinary stiffeners subjected to testing are to be not less than the values obtained from the following formulae:
w= p T sl 2 10 3 1.05mRY
Ash =
5 p T sl 1.05 a sin
COMMON STRUCTURAL RULES FOR BULK CARRIERS where: : Angle, in deg, defined in [3.2.3].
3.6 Scantlings of transverse vertically corrugated watertight bulkheads separating cargo holds for flooded conditions
3.6.1 Bending capacity and shear capacity of the corrugations of transverse vertically corrugated watertight bulkheads separating cargo holds The bending capacity and the shear capacity of the corrugations of watertight bulkheads between separating
ReH 2
where: M : Bending moment in a corrugation, to be obtained, in kN.m, from the following formula: M = FlC / 8 F
lC
: Resultant force, in kN, to be calculated according to Ch 4, Sec 6, [3.3.7] : Span of the corrugations, in m, to be obtained according to [3.6.2] : Net section modulus, in cm3, of one half pitch corrugation, to be calculated at the lower end of the corrugations according to [3.6.2], without being taken greater than the value obtained from the following formula:
2 Q hG 0.5hG sC pG 3 10 WLE , M = WG + ReH
WLE
WG Q
: Net section modulus, in cm3, of one half pitch corrugation, to be calculated in way of the upper end of shedder or gusset plates, as applicable, according to [3.6.2] : Shear force at the lower end of a corrugation, to be obtained, in kN, from the following formula: Q = 0.8F
hG pG sC WM
: Height, in m, of shedders or gusset plates, as applicable (see Fig 11 to Fig 15) : Resultant pressure, in kN/m2, to be calculated in way of the middle of the shedders or gusset plates, as applicable, according to Ch 4, Sec 6, [3.3.7] : Spacing of the corrugations, in m, to be taken according to Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 28 : Net section modulus, in cm3, of one half pitch corrugation, to be calculated at the mid-span of corrugations according to [3.6.2] without being taken greater than 1.15WLE : Shear stress in the corrugation, in N/mm2, to be obtained from the following formula:
= 10
Ash
Q Ash
: Shear area, in cm2, calculated according to the followings. The shear area is to be reduced in order to account for possible non-perpendicular between the corrugation webs and flanges. In general, the reduced shear area may be obtained by multiplying the
web sectional area by (sin ), being the angle between the web and the flange (see Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 28). The actual net section modulus of corrugations is to be calculated according to [3.6.2]. The net section modulus of the corrugations upper part of the bulkhead, as defined in Sec 1, Fig 5, is to be not less than 75% of that of the middle part complying with this requirement and Sec 1, [3.2.1], corrected for different minimum yield stresses.
3.6.2 Net Section modulus at the lower end of corrugations a) The net section modulus at the lower end of corrugations (Fig 11 to Fig 15) is to be calculated with the
compression flange having an effective flange width bef not larger than that indicated in Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.10] b) Webs not supported by local brackets Except in case e), if the corrugation webs are not supported by local brackets below the stool top plate (or below the inner bottom) in the lower part, the section modulus of the corrugations is to be calculated considering the corrugation webs 30% effective. c) Effective shedder plates Provided that effective shedder plates, as defined in Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.11] are fitted (see Fig 11 and Fig 12), when calculating the section modulus of corrugations at the lower end (cross sections 1 in Fig 11 and Fig 12), the net area of flange plates may be increased by the value obtained, in cm2, from the following formula:
I SH = 2.5a t f t SH
where: a tSH tf
: Width, in m, of the corrugation flange (see Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 28) : Net shedder plate thickness, in mm : Net flange thickness, in mm.
d) Effective gusset plates Provided that effective gusset plates, as defined in Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.12], are fitted (see Fig 13 to Fig 15), when calculating the net section modulus of corrugations at the lower end (cross-sections 1 in Fig 13 to Fig 15), the area of flange plates may be increased by the value obtained, in cm2, from the following formula: IG = 7hGtf where: hG tf : Height, in m, of gusset plates (see Fig 13 to Fig 15), to be taken not greater than (10/7)SGU : Net flange thickness, in mm
SGU : Width, in m, of gusset plates e) Sloping stool top plate If the corrugation webs are welded to a sloping stool top plate which has an angle not less than 45 with the horizontal plane, the section modulus of the corrugations may be calculated considering the corrugation webs fully effective. For angles less than 45, the effectiveness of the web may be obtained by linear interpolation between 30% for 0 and 100% for 45. Where effective gusset plates are fitted, when calculating the net section modulus of corrugations the net area of flange plates may be increased as specified in d) above. No credit may be given to shedder plates only.
shedder plate
hG
shedder plate
hG
lower stool
lower stool
gusset plate
hG gusset plate
hG lower stool
lower stool
Figure 13: Symmetrical gusset/shedder plates
hG
= = lower stool
The net section modulus of stiffeners in lower stool and upper stool is to be greater of the values obtained from the following formula or required by [3.2.5].
w=
Where, p
Section 3 BUCKLING & ULTIMATE STRENGTH OF ORDINARY STIFFENERS AND STIFFENED PANELS
The shear stress , calculated according to Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.6.1 3.2.6], is to comply with the following formula:
C
where: C : Critical shear buckling stress to be obtained, in N/mm2, from the following formulae:
C = E
for E
ReH 2 3
R eH 2 3
C =
E
ReH 1 ReH 3 4 3 E
for E >
: Euler shear buckling stress to be obtained, in N/mm2, from the following formula:
E = 0 .9 k t E
kt tW c
tw 3 10 c
: Coefficient, to be taken equal to 6.34 : Net thickness, in mm, of the corrugation webs : Width, in m of the corrugation webs (see Ch 3, Sec 6, Fig 28Ch 6, Sec 2, Fig 2).
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
2.4 Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.8] Upper stool and Ch 6, Sec 1, [3.2.3 bis1] The scantling requirements are deleted and shifted to Ch 6, Sec 1 [3.2.3 bis1] and net scantling basis is clarified. Taking account of the answer in KC ID 332, it is clarified that the bulkhead plating below the upper stool bottom plating and upper part of the bulkhead plating are according to [3.2.3] or [3.2.4]. 2.5 Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.9] Alignment and Ch 6, Sec 1, [3.2.3 bis2] The scantling requirements in Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.9] are deleted and shifted to Ch 6, Sec 1, [3.2.3 bis2], considering the consistency with the requirement in Ch 3, Sec 6, [6.4.2] and net scantling basis is clarified. 2.6 Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.13] Section modulus at the lower end of corrugations and Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.6.2] The requirement in Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.13] is deleted and shifted to the new paragraph Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.6.2] since it is only related to the scantling requirements for flooded condition. Further in the new paragraph figure nos. are corrected from 31 thru 35 to 11 thru 15 accordingly and the cross references in the text are modified. 2.7 Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.14] Section modulus at sections other than the lower end of corrugations and Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.15] Shear area The requirement in Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.14] is deleted and shifted to the new paragraph Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.6.2] (a). The requirement in Ch 3, Sec 6, [10.4.15] is deleted and shifted to the new paragraph Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.6.1]. 2.8 Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.1.1] Figure 2 is only applicable when section modulus of corrugated bulkhead is investigated according to Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.2.4]. Figure 2 is same as Ch 3, Sec 6, and Figure 28. In order to avoid users misinterpretation Ch 6, Sec 2, [2.1.1] is deleted together with Figure 2. 2.9 Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.2.4], Tables 4 and 5 The definition of the effective width of the corrugation flange is added and Tables 4 and 5 are clarified. 2.10 Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.2.6], Bending capacity and shear capacity of the corrugations of transverse vertically corrugated watertight bulkheads separating cargo holds for flooded conditions and [3.6] This paragraph is deleted and shifted to the new paragraph Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.6.2] so that all requirements related to flooded condition are unified together in the new paragraph Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.6] and the paragraph Ch 6, Sec 2, [3.6] is newly provided so that the UR S18 requirements can be clearly collected and identified therein. In addition, for determining the net section modulus of stiffeners in lower stool and upper stool, as it is necessary to consider the pressure specified in Ch 4, Sec 6, [3.3.7] which comes from IACS UR S18, the new paragraph [3.6.3] is added. 2.11 Ch 6, Sec 3, [6.1.1] The reference is changed, according to the modification of Ch 6, Sec 2.
3. Impact on Scantling
Since the subject revisions to the text are: a) the clarification of the text in line with the original intention, or b) the clarification of the texts. For a) it is not necessary to perform impact study. For b) it is not possible to perform impact study because the basis is not identified clearly.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-9.
from the formulae in Tab 2. However, the net cross-sectional area of each bedplate of the seatings may be determined by the engine manufacturers, provided the information regarding permissible foundation stiffness considering the engine characteristics and engine room arrangement, etc..
Table 2: Minimum scantlings of the structural elements in way of machinery seatings Scantling minimum value Net cross-sectional area, in cm2, of each bedplate of the seatings Scantling minimum value
40 + 70
P nr LE
P nr LE P nr LE
Total web net thickness, in mm, of girders fitted in way of machinery seatings
55 + 40
Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No.1-9 (Main Engine Foundation)
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0.00 0 50 100 150 200 Ship's Length (L) (m) 250 300
1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0.00 0 5000 10000 Engine power (kW) 15000 20000
0.0
5.0
10.0
15.0 P/(Nr*Le)
20.0
25.0
Actual / Required
1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0.00 0 50 100 150 200 Ship's Length (L) (m) 250 300
0.0
5.0
10.0
15.0 P/(Nr*Le)
20.0
25.0
1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0.00 0 50 100 150 200 Ship's Length (L) (m) 250 300
1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0.00 0 5000 10000 Engine power (kW) 15000 20000
0.0
5.0
10.0
15.0 P/(Nr*Le)
20.0
25.0
1.00 0.80 0.60 0.40 0.20 0.00 0 5000 10000 Engine power (kW) 15000 20000
0.0
5.0
10.0
15.0 P/(Nr*Le)
20.0
25.0
From these results, it is necessary to clarify the dealing with the formula for cross-sectional area of engine seatings. In this regard, we considered that it is possible to deal with the drawings supplied by the engine manufactures with information regarding permissible foundation stiffness considering the engine characteristics and engine room arrangement, etc..
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
1 / 97
Table of contents1
Rule Change Notice No. 2-2 Loads on exposed decks considering UR S21 and loads on non-exposed decks .................................................................................................................................... 3 Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-2 Loads on exposed decks considering UR S21 and loads on non-exposed decks .............................................................................. 7 Rule Change Notice No. 2-3 Hatch cover .............................................................................................. 11 Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-3 Hatch Cover.................................................. 15 Rule Change Notice No. 2-4 Rudder Area Recommendation ................................................................ 19 Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-4 Rudder Area Recommendation .................... 23 Rule Change Notice No. 2-5 Lightweight .............................................................................................. 27 Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-5 Lightweight .................................................. 31 Rule Change Notice No. 2-6 Protection Measure From Grab Wire ....................................................... 35 Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-6 Protection Measure From Grab Wire................................................................................................................................................ 39 Rule Change Notice No. 2-7 PMA......................................................................................................... 43 Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-7 PMA ............................................................. 47 Rule Change Notice No. 2-9 Recommendation No. 47 ......................................................................... 51 Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-9 Recommendation No 47 ............................... 57 Rule Change Notice No. 2-11 Welding.................................................................................................. 61 Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-11 Welding ...................................................... 67 Rule Change Notice No. 2-12 Hold Mass Curves .................................................................................. 71 Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-12 Hold Mass Curves ...................................... 83 Rule Change Notice No. 2-13 Use of Steel Grades for Hull Members .................................................. 87 Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-13 Use of steel grades for hull member ................................................................................................................................................... 95
Note: Rule Change Proposals 2-1, 2-8, 2-10, 2-14 and 2-16 are not included in this Rule Change Notice document pending further consideration by IACS following feedback during the review process.
2 / 97
Rule Change Notice No. 2-2 Loads on exposed decks considering UR S21 and loads on non-exposed decks
Notes: (1) (2) These Rule Changes enter into force on 1st July 2010. This Rule Change Notice should be read in conjunction with the July 2008 consolidated edition of Bulk Carriers CSR.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
3 / 97
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No. 2-2.
4 / 97
pD pW
where: : Pressure obtained from the formulae in Tab 4 pW : Coefficient defined in Tab 5 Table 4: Pressures on exposed decks for H1, H2, F1 and F2 Pressure pW, in kN/m2 LLL 100 m LLL < 100 m
34.3
x 34.3 14.8 LLL 100 4 LL 3 L LL
12.2
where: : Coefficient taken equal to: = 0.0726 for Type B freeboard ships = 0.356 for Type B-60 or Type B-100 freeboard ships. xLL: X coordinate of the load point measured from the aft end of the freeboard length LLL.
Table 5: Coefficient for pressure on exposed decks Exposed deck location Freeboard deck and forecastle deck Superstructure deck, excluding forecastle deck including forecastle deck 1st tier of deckhouse 2 tier of deckhouse 3 tier of deckhouse 4 tier of deckhouse 5 tier of deckhouse 6 tier of deckhouse 7th tier of deckhouse and above
th th th rd nd
5 / 97
Load model
Loads Lateral pressure for decks
The lateral pressure for decks of superstructures and deckhouses, in kN/m2, is to be taken equal to: the external pressure pD defined in Ch 4, Sec 5, [2.1] for exposed decks, 5kN/m for unexposed decks.
6 / 97
Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-2 Loads on exposed decks considering UR S21 and loads on non-exposed decks
Notes: (1) (2) These Rule Changes enter into force on 1st July 2010. The Rule Change Notice should be read in conjunction with the July 2008 consolidated edition of Bulk Carriers CSR.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
7 / 97
This document gives the technical background of the Rule Change Notice No. 2-2 of the July 2008 edition of the Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers.
8 / 97
1.2
1.3
2.2
2.3
9 / 97
3 Impact on Scantling
3.1 Chapter 4, Section 5, Table 4
There is no change in term of steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule Change.
3.2
3.3
10 / 97
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
11 / 97
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No. 2-3.
12 / 97
13 / 97
Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-3 Hatch Cover
Notes: (1) (2) These Rule Changes enter into force on 1st July 2010. This Rule Change Notice should be read in conjunction with the July 2008 consolidated edition of Bulk Carriers CSR.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
15 / 97
This document gives the technical background of the Rule Change Notice No. 2-3 of the July 2008 edition of the Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers.
16 / 97
Impact on Scantling
There is no change in term of steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule Change.
17 / 97
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
19 / 97
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No. 2-4.
20 / 97
General
Manoeuvring arrangement
1.3
where: c1 = Factor taken equal to 0.9 c2 = Factor for the rudder type: c2 = 1.0 in general c2 = 0.9 for semi-spade rudders c2 = 0.7 for high lift rudders c3 = Factor for the rudder profile: c3 = 1.0 for NACA-profiles and plate rudder c3 = 0.8 for hollow profiles and mixed profiles c4 = Factor for the rudder arrangement: c4 = 1.0 for rudders in the propeller jet c4 = 1.5 for rudders outside the propeller jet For semi-spade rudders 50% of the projected area of the rudder horn may be included into the rudder area A. Where more than one rudder is arranged the area of each rudder can be reduced by 20%. In estimating the rudder area A, [2.1] is to be considered. (void)
21 / 97
Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-4 Rudder Area Recommendation
Notes: (1) (2) These Rule Changes enter into force on 1st July 2010. This Rule Change Notice should be read in conjunction with the July 2008 consolidated edition of Bulk Carriers CSR.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
23 / 97
This document gives the technical background of the Rule Change Notice No. 2-4 of the July 2008 edition of the Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers.
24 / 97
1
1.1
2
2.1
3
3.1
Impact on Scantling
Chapter 10, Section 1, [1.1.1] and [1.3]
The now deleted formula in [1.3] is only a recommendation and not a requirement; hence there is no change in terms of the steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule Change.
25 / 97
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
27 / 97
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No. 2-5.
28 / 97
Definitions
Lightweight
29 / 97
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
31 / 97
This document gives the technical background of the Rule Change Notice No. 2-5 of the July 2008 edition of the Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers.
32 / 97
1
1.1
2
2.1
3
3.1
Impact on Scantling
Chapter 1, Section 4, [3.7.1]
There is no change in terms of the steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule Change.
33 / 97
Rule Change Notice No. 2-6 Protection Measure From Grab Wire
Notes: (1) (2) These Rule Changes enter into force on 1st July 2010. This Rule Change Notice should be read in conjunction with the July 2008 consolidated edition of Bulk Carriers CSR.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
35 / 97
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No. 2-6.
36 / 97
Deck structure
Hatch supporting structures
37 / 97
Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-6 Protection Measure From Grab Wire
Notes: (1) (2) These Rule Changes enter into force on 1st July 2010. This Technical Background For Rule Change Notice should be read in conjunction with the July 2008 consolidated edition of Bulk Carriers CSR.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
39 / 97
This document gives the technical background of the Rule Change Notice No. 2-6 of the July 2008 edition of the Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers.
40 / 97
1
1.1
2
2.1
3
3.1
Impact on Scantling
Chapter 3, Section 6, [9.5.4]
There is no change in terms of steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule Change.
41 / 97
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
43 / 97
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No. 2-7.
44 / 97
45 / 97
General
Application
1.1 1.1.1
Ref. SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6 .2.1 (Resolution MSC.151(78)) Each space is to be provided with means of access to enable, throughout the life of a ship, overall and close-up inspections and thickness measurements of the ships structures. Such means of access are to comply with [1.3] and [2].
1.1.2
Ref. SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6 .2.2 (Resolution MSC.151(78)) Where a permanent means of access may be susceptible to damage during normal cargo loading and unloading operations or where it is impracticable to fit permanent means of access, the Administration may allow, in lieu thereof, the provision of movable or portable means of access, as specified in [2], provided that the means of attaching, rigging, suspending or supporting the portable means of access forms a permanent part of the ships structure. All portable equipment are to be capable of being readily erected or deployed by ships personnel.
1.1.3
Ref. SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6 .2.3 (Resolution MSC.151(78)) The construction and materials of all means of access and their attachment to the ships structure are to be to the satisfaction of the Society.
46 / 97
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
47 / 97
This document gives the technical background of the Rule Change Notice No. 2-7 of the July 2008 edition of the Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers.
48 / 97
1
1.1
1.2
2
2.1
2.2
3
3.1
Impact on Scantling
Chapter 1, Section 3, [2.5.1]
There is no change in terms of steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule Change.
3.2
49 / 97
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
51 / 97
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No. 2-9.
52 / 97
Section 1 CONSTRUCTION 1.
1.2 1.2.1
For cold forming (bending, flanging, beading) of plates corrugated bulkhead the minimum average inside bending radius is to be not less than 32t (t = as-built thickness). In order to prevent cracking, flame cutting flash or sheering burrs are to be removed before cold forming. After cold forming all structural components and, in particular, the ends of bends (plate edges) are to be examined for cracks. Except in cases where edge cracks are negligible, all cracked components are to be rejected. Repair welding is not permissible.
Structural details
Cold forming
53 / 97
1.3 1.3.1
Assembly, alignment
Table 1: Alignment (t, t1 and t2: as-built thickness) Detail Alignment of butt welds Standard Limit Remarks
a) Strength and higher tensile steel a t1 / 4 measured on the median a (5t1 3t2) / 6 measured on the heel line b) Other a t1 / 2 measured on the median a (2 t1 t2) / 2 measured on the heel line
Alternatively, heel line can be used to check the alignment. Where t2 t3 is less than t1, then t2 t3 should be substituted for t1.
Alignment of fillet welds a) Strength and higher tensile steel a t1 / 3 measured on the median b) Other a t1 / 2 measured on the heel line Strength member and higher stress member: a t1/3 Other: a t1/2 Alternatively, heel line can be used to check the alignment. Where t3 is less than t1, then t3 should be substitute for t1.
Note: strength means the following elements: strength deck, inner bottom, bottom, lower stool, lower part of transverse bulkhead, bilge hopper and side frames of single side bulk carriers.
54 / 97
Strength member a 0.15 t for primary supporting members Other a 0.2 t for ordinary stiffeners
a = 3.0 mm
d L / 50
Note: strength means the following elements: strength deck, inner bottom, bottom, lower stool, lower part of transverse bulkhead, bilge hopper and side frames of single side bulk carriers.
55 / 97
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
57 / 97
This document gives the technical background of the Rule Change Notice No. 2-9 of the July 2008 edition of the Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers.
58 / 97
1
1.1
1.2
2
2.1
2.2
3
3.1
Impact on Scantling
Chapter 2, Section 1, [3.1.1]
There is no change in terms of steel weight by comparing that before and after the proposed Rule Change.
3.2
59 / 97
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
61 / 97
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No. 2-11.
62 / 97
Section 2 WELDING 2.
2.6 2.6.1
Category F0 F1
Kinds of fillet welds Double continuous weld Double continuous weld Double continuous weld Double continuous weld
Leg length of fillet weld, in mm (2), (3) 0.7t 0.5t + 1.0 0.4t + 2.0 0.3t + 4.0 0.4t + 1.0 0.3t + 2.0 0.2t + 4.0 0.3t + 1.0 0.2t + 2.0 0.1t + 4.0 0.5t + 1.0 0.4t + 2.0
Pitch, in mm -
F2
F3
F4
Intermittent weld
75
300
20 t 0.3t + 4.0 (1) t is as-built thickness of the thinner of two connected members the abutting plate, in mm. In case of cross joint as specified in Fig 1, t is the thinner thickness of the continuous member and the abutting plate, to be considered independently for each abutting plate. (2) Leg length of fillet welds is made fine adjustments corresponding to the corrosion addition tC specified in Ch 3, Sec 3, Tab 1 as follows: + 1.0 mm for tC > 5 + 0.5 mm for 5 tC > 4 + 0.0 mm for 4 tC > 3 - 0.5 mm for tC 3 (3) The weld sizes are to be rounded to Leg length is rounded to the nearest half millimetre.
63 / 97
Table2: Application of fillet welds Hull area Connection Of To Watertight plate Boundary plating Brackets at ends of members Deep tank bulkheads Ordinary stiffener and Web of primary supporting members and collar plate collar plates Plating (Except deep tank bulkhead) Face plates of At ends (15% of span) Web of ordinary stiffener built-up Elsewhere stiffeners End of primary supporting Deck plate, shell plate, inner bottom plate, members and ordinary bulkhead plate stiffeners without brackets End of primary supporting Deck plate, shell plate, inner bottom plate, members and ordinary bulkhead plate stiffeners with brackets Ordinary stiffener Bottom and inner bottom plating Shell plates in strengthened bottom forward Center girder Inner bottom plate and shell plate except the above Side girder including intercostal plate Bottom and double bottom Floor Bottom and inner bottom plating Shell plates and inner At ends, on a length equal to bottom two frame spaces plates Center girder and side girders in way of hopper tanks Elsewhere Center girder, inner bottom and shell plates Floor and girder Side plating, inner side plating and web of primary supporting members Category F1 F1 F3 F2 F4 F2 F4 F0 F1 F3 F1 F2 F3
Bracket on center girder Web stiffener Side and inner side in double side structure Side frame of single side structure Web of primary supporting members
Side frame and end bracket Tripping bracket Strength deck Other deck t 13 t < 13
Side shell plate Side shell plate and side frame Side shell plating within 0.6L midship Elsewhere Side shell plating Side shell plating Ordinary stiffeners Deck plating Deck plating Coaming webs At corners of hatchways for 15% of the hatch length Elsewhere
Deck
F1 F2 F4
64 / 97
Hull area
Connection Of Non-watertight bulkhead structure Ordinary stiffener To Boundaries Bulkhead plating Shell plating, deck plating, inner bottom plating, bulkhead Swash bulkheads At ends (25% of span), where no end brackets are fitted At end (15% of span)
Category F3 F1 F1
Bulkheads
Elsewhere
F2
After peak
Internal members
Seating
External bulkhead Superstructure and deck houses Ordinary stiffeners End section of ordinary stiffener and Primary supporting member Pillar
In tanks, and located within 0.125L from fore peak Face plate Face area exceeds 65 cm2 Elsewhere Boundaries and each other In way of main engine, thrust Bed plate bearing, boiler bearers and main generator engines In way of main engine and Girder plate thrust bearing Inner In way of main engine and bottom plate thrust bearing and shell Deck Side wall At end (15% of span) and deck Elsewhere plate Without brackets Side wall and web of primary With bracket supporting members
F2 F2 F3 F2 F1 F1 F2 F1 F3 F4(2) F1 F2
Heel and F1 head Ventilator Coaming Deck F1 Vertical frames forming main piece F1 Rudder Rudder frame Rudder plate F3 Rudder frames except above F2 (1) For Hatch cover, weld sizes F1, F2 and F3 instead of F0, F1 and F2, respectively, are to be used. Pillar (2) Where the one side continuous welding is applied, the weld size F3 is to be applied. (3) The interior bulkheads are not included in this category. The welding of the interior bulkheads is to be subjected to the discretion of the Society.
65 / 97
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
67 / 97
This document gives the technical background of the Rule Change Notice No. 2-11 of the July 2008 edition of the Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers.
68 / 97
2
2.1
2.2
Table 2
1) Categories for the case where a bracket is provided at the end connection of ordinary stiffener and primary supporting member are added and weld size of such connection is F1. 2) Primary supporting member is clarified. 3) Weld size of ordinary stiffener and primary supporting members in superstructures and deckhouses is added. 4) Application of weld size for hatch cover is added as a note of Table 2.
Impact on Scantling
Weld size where the thickness of abutting plate is different may be bigger, but the impact may be less because the current weld design is determined based on the abutting plate thickness as proposed by this RCP.
69 / 97
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
71 / 97
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No. 2-12.
72 / 97
2
2.1 2.1.1
2.1.2
For loaded holds The maximum permissible mass (Wmax(Ti)) at various draughts (Ti) is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
Wmax (TS ) M HD 0.1M H
Ti h However, Wmax(Ti) is in no case to be greater than MHD. Wmax (Ti ) M HD 0.1M H 1.025V H
TS
73 / 97
The minimum required cargo mass (Wmin(Ti)) at various draughts (Ti) is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
Wmin (Ti ) 0
Wmin (Ti ) 1.025VH
for
Ti 0.83TS TS Ti 0.83TS
Ti 0.83TS
h
for
The maximum permissible mass Wmax(Ti) at various draughts Ti is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
for
TS Ti 0.67TS Ti 0.67TS
0.67TS Ti
h
for
Wmin (Ti ) 0
for
Ti TS
Examples for mass curve of loaded cargo hold and cargo hold which can be empty at the maximum draught for BC-A ships not having {No MP} assigned are shown in Fig 1.
1.15 (MHD + 0.1MH) M HD+0.1 M H M HD Harbour Cargo mass 0.15 M 0.15(M HD +0.1 M H) Cargo mass 0.15M Full Harbour 1.15 MFull M Full
Seagoing
Seagoing
TS
Draught
0.67TS
TS
Draught
Figure 1: Example of mass curve for BC-A ships not having {No MP} assigned
2.1.3
The maximum permissible mass (Wmax(Ti)) at various draughts (Ti) is the same specified in [2.1.2]. The minimum required mass (Wmin(Ti)) is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
Wmin (Ti ) 0
Wmin (Ti ) 1.025VH
for
Ti THB TS Ti THB or
TS Ti
Ti THB
h
for for
TS Ti 0
h
74 / 97
The maximum permissible mass (Wmax(Ti)) and the minimum required mass (Wmin(Ti)) at various draughts ( Ti ) are the same specified in [2.1.2]. The maximum permissible mass (Wmax(Ti)) at various draughts (Ti) is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
TS Ti
h
The minimum required cargo mass (Wmin(Ti)) at various draughts (Ti) is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
Wmin (Ti ) 0
for
Ti TS
Examples for mass curve of cargo hold for BC-A ships, having {No MP} assigned are shown in Fig 2.
1.15 MHD + 0.1MH M HD+0.1M H M HD
Cargo mass
0.15MFull
Seagoing
0.5M H
Seagoing
T HB
0.67 T S
TS
0
Draught
0.67TS
TS
Draught
Figure 2: Example of mass curve for BC-A ships having {No MP} assigned
2.1.4
for
TS Ti 0.67TS Ti 0.67TS
0.67TS Ti
h
for
The minimum required cargo mass (Wmin(Ti)) at various draughts (Ti) is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
Wmin (Ti ) 0
Wmin (Ti ) 1.025VH
for
Ti 0.83TS TS Ti 0.83TS
Ti 0.83TS
h
for
Example for mass curve of cargo hold for BC-B and BC-C ships is shown in Fig. 3.
75 / 97
Cargo mass
0.15MFull
Seagoing
0.67TS 0.83TS
TS
Draught
Figure 3: Example of mass curve for BC-B and BC-C ships not having {No MP} assigned
2.1.5
TS Ti
h
The minimum required cargo mass (Wmin(Ti)) at various draughts (Ti) is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
Wmin (Ti ) 0
Wmin (Ti ) 1.025VH
for
Ti THB TS Ti THB or
Ti THB
h
for
h
TS Ti
for
TS Ti
Wmin(Ti) 0.0 Examples for mass curve of cargo hold for BC-B or BC-C ships with {No MP} areis shown in Fig 24.
1.15MFull MFull Harbour Cargo mass Cargo mass Harbour 1.15MFull MFull
Seagoing
Seagoing
0.67TS 0.83TS
TS
Draught
THB 0.67TS
TS
Draught
76 / 97
0.15MFull
Seagoing
0.5MH
THB
0.67TS
TS
Draught
Figure 2 4: Example of mass curve for BC-B or BC-C ships Example of mass curve for BC-B and BC-C ships having {No MP} assigned
2.2 2.2.1
Maximum permissible mass and minimum required masses of single cargo hold in harbour condition General
The cargo mass curves of single cargo hold in harbour condition are defined in [2.2.2]. However if the ship structure is checked for more severe loading conditions than ones considered in Ch 4, Sec 7, [3.7.1], the minimum required cargo mass and the maximum allowable cargo mass can be based on those corresponding loading conditions.
2.2.2
All ships
The maximum permissible cargo mass and the minimum required cargo mass corresponding to draught for loading/unloading conditions in harbour may be increased or decreased by 15% of the maximum permissible mass at the maximum draught for the cargo hold in seagoing condition. However, maximum permissible mass is in no case to be greater than the maximum permissible cargo mass at designed maximum load draught for each cargo hold.
2.2.3
Wmax (Ti ) M HD
for for
Ti 0.67TS
Ti 0.67T S
2.2.4
for for
TS Ti 0.67TS Ti 0.67TS
0.67TS Ti
h
77 / 97
2.2.5
for
TS Ti 0.67TS Ti 0.67TS
0.67TS Ti
h
for
3
3.1 3.1.1
3.1.2
BC-A ships with Block loading and not having {No MP} assigned
The maximum permissible cargo mass (Wmax(Ti)) and the minimum required cargo mass (Wmin(Ti)) for the adjacent two holds at various draughts (Ti) are determined, in t, by the following formulae:
W max (Ti ) 2M Full or M HD 0.1M H , whichever is the greater
0.67ThS Ti
Ti 0h.75TS
for TS Ti 0.75TS
The maximum permissible mass (Wmax(Ti)) at various draughts (Ti) is obtained, in t, by the greater of the following formulae:
or
The minimum required cargo mass (Wmin(Ti)) at various draughts (Ti) is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
Wmin (Ti ) 0
for for
Ti 0.75TS TS Ti 0.75TS
78 / 97
3.1.2 bis BC-A ships with Block loading and having {No MP} assigned
The maximum permissible mass Wmax(Ti) at various draughts Ti is obtained, in t, by the following formula:
for for
Ti T HB TS Ti T HB
Examples for mass curve of cargo hold for BC-A with block loading ships are shown in Fig 5.
Harbour
Cargo mass
Seagoing
Seagoing
0.67TS 0.75TS
(a) without {No MP]
TS
Draught
THB
(b) with {No MP}
TS
Draught
Figure 5: Example of mass curve for BC-A ships with Block loading
3.1.3
0.67ThS Ti
Ti 0h.75TS
for TS Ti 0.75TS
79 / 97
(void)
3.1.4
BC-A ships without Block loading and BC-B, BC-C ships, not having {No MP} assigned
The maximum permissible mass (Wmax(Ti)) at various draughts Ti is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
for for
TS Ti 0.67TS Ti 0.67TS
Full
Vf V 1.025 a 0.67TS Ti hf ha
The minimum required cargo mass (Wmin(Ti)) at various draughts Ti is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
Wmin (Ti ) 0
for for
Ti 0.75TS TS Ti 0.75TS
3.1.5
BC-A ships without Block loading and BC-B, BC-C ships, having {No MP} assigned
The maximum permissible mass (Wmax(Ti)) at various draughts Ti is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
Wmax Ti
Full
Vf V 1.025 a TS Ti hf ha
for
Ti TS
The minimum required cargo mass (Wmin(Ti)) at various draughts Ti is obtained, in t, by the following formulae:
Wmin (Ti ) 0
for for
Ti T HB TS Ti T HB
80 / 97
Examples for mass curve of cargo hold for BC-A without block loading and BC-B or BC-C are shown in Fig 6.
(1.15MFull)
Harbour
(1.15MFull) (MFull)
Harbour Cargo mass
(MFull)
Cargo mass
0.15 (MFull )
Seagoing
Seagoing
0.15 (MFull )
0.67TS 0.75TS
(a) without {No MP]
TS
Draught
THB
0.67TS
TS
Draught
Figure 6: Example of mass curve for BC A-ship without block loading and BC-B or BC-C ships
3.2 3.2.1
Maximum permissible mass and minimum required masses of two adjacent cargo holds in harbour condition General
The cargo mass curves of two adjacent cargo holds in harbour condition are defined in [3.2.2]. However if the ship structure is checked for more severe loading conditions than ones considered in Ch 4, Sec 7, [3.7.1], the minimum required cargo mass and the maximum allowable cargo mass can be based on those corresponding loading conditions.
3.2.2
All ships
The maximum permissible cargo mass and minimum required cargo mass corresponding to draught for loading/unloading conditions in harbour may be increased or decreased by 15% of the maximum permissible mass at the maximum draught for the cargo hold in seagoing condition. However, maximum permissible mass is in no case to be greater than the maximum permissible cargo mass at designed maximum load draught for each cargo hold.
3.2.3
BC-A ships with Block loading and having {No MP} assigned
The maximum permissible mass (Wmax(Ti)) at various draughts Ti in harbour condition is also to be checked by the following formulae in addition to the requirements in [3.1.2 bis]:
V f Va 0.67TS Ti Wmax Ti M Full 1.025 h ha f
3.2.4
BC-A ships without Block loading and BC-B, BC-C ships, having {No MP} assigned
The maximum permissible mass (Wmax(Ti)) at various draughts Ti in harbour condition is also to be checked by the following formulae in addition to the requirements in [3.1.5]:
for
TS Ti 0.67TS
81 / 97
for
Ti 0.67TS
82 / 97
Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-12 Hold Mass Curves
Notes: (1) (2)
These Rule Changes enter into force on 1st July 2010. The Technical Background For Rule Change Notice should be read in conjunction with the July 2008 consolidated edition of Bulk Carriers CSR.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
83 / 97
This document gives the technical background of the Rule Change Notice No. 2-12 of the July 2008 edition of the Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers.
84 / 97
Ch4 Sec7, 3.3.2 83%TS, empty Ch4 Sec7, 3.2.2 TS, MH/2 Ch4 Sec7, 3.2.3 THB, empty Ch4 Sec7, 3.6.1 67%TS, MFull -
Cases in Hold addition of Ch4 Sec7, 3.4.2 Ch4 Sec7, 3.6.1 loaded in those alternate TS, MHD+0.1MH 67%TS, MHD defined Hold above for Ch4 Sec7, 3.4.1 empty in BC-B and BC-C alternate TS, empty (1) Maximum permissible mass and minimum required mass in harbour condition are generally increased or decreased by 15% of the maximum permissible mass at the maximum draught in seagoing condition as stipulated in Chapter 4 Appendix 1, 2.2.2 and based on Chapter 4 Section 7, 3.6.3. The notes for harbour in this table show only the additional conditions based on Chapter 4 Section 7, 3.6.1. 6) Maximum permissible mass and minimum required mass of two adjacent holds Maximum permissible mass and minimum required mass of two adjacent holds regulated in Chapter 4 Appendix 1, paragraph 3 are based on following design loading conditions regulated in Chapter 4 Section 7, [3.2] to [3.6], except [3.5.1].
85 / 97
Sea going Max Ch4 Sec7, 3.3.3 Ch4 Sec7, 3.4.3 67%Ts, (Mfull) Ts, (MBLK+0.1MH) Ch4 Sec7, 3.4.3 Ts, (MBLK+0.1MH) Ch4 Sec7, 3.3.3 67%TS, (MFull) Ch4 Sec7, 3.2.1 Min Ch4 Sec7, 3.3.4 -
75%TS, empty Ch4 Sec7, 3.2.3 THB, empty Ch4 Sec7, 3.3.4 75%TS, empty Ch4 Sec7, 3.2.3
BC-A without "Block loading", BC-B and BC-C in Ch4 App1, 3.1.3 (2)
TS, (MFull) THB, empty 67%TS, (MFull) Maximum permissible mass and minimum required mass in harbour condition are generally increased or decreased by 15% of the maximum permissible mass at the maximum draught in seagoing condition as stipulated in Chapter 4 Appendix 1, 3.2.2 and based on Chapter 4 Section 7, 3.6.3. The notes for harbour in this table show only the additional conditions based on Chapter 4 Section 7, 3.6.2.
Impact on Scantling
As this rule change is so made for the clarification corresponding to each class notation or simple correction of typo and scantling check is carried out based on the requirement in Ch 4 Sec 7 which is the same of IACS UR S25, there is no scantling impact due to this change.
86 / 97
Rule Change Notice No. 2-13 Use of Steel Grades for Hull Members
Notes: (1) (2)
These Rule Changes enter into force on 1st July 2010. This Rule Change Notice should be read in conjunction with the July 2008 consolidated edition of Bulk Carriers CSR.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
87 / 97
For technical background for Rule Changes in this present document, reference is made to separate document Technical Background for Rule Change Notice No. 2-13.
88 / 97
Section 1 MATERIAL 2.
2.3 2.3.1
Steel materials in the various strength members are not to be of lower grade than those corresponding to classes I, II and III, as given in Tab 3 for the material classes and grades given in Tab 4 Tab 4-1, while additional requirements for ships with length (L) exceeding 150m and 250m, BC-A and BC-B ships are given in Tab 4-2 to Tab 4-4., For strength members not mentioned in Tab 3 in Tab 4-1 to Tab 4-4, grade A/AH may be used.
Table 3: Material grade requirements for classes I, II and III
Class I As-built thickness NSS HSS (mm) t 15 A AH 15 < t 20 A AH 20 < t 25 A AH 25 < t 30 A AH 30 < t 35 B AH 35 < t 40 B AH 40 < t 50 D DH Notes : NSS : Normal strength steel HSS : Higher strength steel
III HSS AH AH DH DH EH EH EH
89 / 97
SECONDARY Longitudinal bulkhead strakes, other than that belonging to the Primary category Deck Plating exposed to weather, other than that belonging to the Primary or Special I category (7) Side plating PRIMARY Bottom plating, including keel plate Strength deck plating, excluding that belonging to the Special category II Continuous longitudinal members above strength deck, excluding hatch coamings Uppermost strake in longitudinal bulkhead Vertical strake (hatch side girder) and uppermost sloped strake in top wing tank SPECIAL Sheer strake at strength deck (1), (6) Stringer plate in strength deck (1), (6) Deck strake at longitudinal bulkhead (6) Strength deck plating at corners of cargo hatch openings in bulk carriers, ore carriers, combination carriers and other ships with similar hatch openings configuration (2) III Bilge strake (3), (4), (6) Longitudinal hatch coamings of length greater than 0.15L (5) Lower bracket of side frame of single side bulk carriers having additional service feature BC-A or BC-B (5) End brackets and deck house transition of longitudinal cargo hatch coamings (5) Notes: (1) Not to be less than grade E/EH within 0.4L amidships in ships with length exceeding 250 m. (3) May be of class II in ships with a double bottom over the full breadth and with length less than 150 m. (4) Not to be less than grade D/DH within 0.4L amidships in ships with length exceeding 250 m. (5) Not to be less than grade D/DH.
A/AH
A/AH
(2) Not to be less than class III within 0.6L amidships and class II within the remaining length of the cargo region.
(6) Single strakes required to be of class III or of grade E/EH and within 0.4L amidships are to have breadths, in m, not less than 0.8 + 0.05L, need not be greater than 1.8 m, unless limited by the geometry of the ship's design. (7) For BC-A and BC-B ships with single side skin structures, side shell strakes included totally or partially between the two points located to 0.125 above and below the intersection of side shell and bilge hopper sloping plate are not to be less than grade D/DH, being the frame span.
90 / 97
Table 4-1: - Material Classes and Grades for ships in general Structural member category Material class/grade
SECONDARY: A1 Longitudinal bulkhead strakes, other than that belonging to the Primary category A2 Deck plating exposed to weather, other than that belonging to the Primary or Special category A3 Side plating PRIMARY: B1 Bottom plating, including keel plate B2 Strength deck plating, excluding that belonging to the Special category B3 Continuous longitudinal members above strength deck, excluding hatch coamings. B4 Uppermost strake in longitudinal bulkhead B5 Vertical strake (hatch side girder) and uppermost sloped strake in top wing tank SPECIAL: C1. Sheer strake at strength deck (1) C2 Stringer plate in strength deck (1) C3 Deck strake at longitudinal bulkhead, excluding deck plating in way of inner-skin bulkhead of double-hull ships (1) Strength deck plating at corners of cargo hatch openings Bilge strake in ships with double bottom over the full breadth and length less than 150 m (1) Bilge strake in other ships (1)
- Class III within 0.4L amidships - Class II outside 0.4L amidships - Class I outside 0.6L amidships
C5 C6 C7
- Class III within 0.6L amidships - Class II within rest of cargo region - Class II within 0.6L amidships - Class I outside 0.6L amidships - Class III within 0.4L amidships - Class II outside 0.4L amidships - Class I outside 0.6L amidships - Class III within 0.4L amidships - Class II outside 0.4L amidships - Class I outside 0.6L amidships - Not to be less than Grade D/DH
C8 C9
Longitudinal hatch coamings of length greater than 0.15L End brackets and deck house transition of longitudinal cargo hatch coamings (2)
(1)
Single strakes required to be of Class III within 0.4L amidships are to have breadths not less than 800+5L (mm), and need not be greater than 1800 (mm), unless limited by the geometry of the ships design. Applicable to bulk carriers having the longitudinal hatch coaming of length greater than 0.15L.
(2)
91 / 97
Table 4-2: Minimum material grades for ships with ships length (L) exceeding 150m and single strength deck Structural member category Longitudinal strength members of strength deck plating Continuous longitudinal strength members above strength deck Single side strakes for ships without inner continuous longitudinal bulkheads between bottom and the strength deck Material Grade Grade B/AH within 0.4L amidships
Grade B/AH within 0.4L amidships Grade B/AH within cargo region
Table 4-3: Minimum Material Grades for ships with ships length (L) exceeding 250m Structural member category Material Grade Shear strake at strength deck (1) Grade E/EH within 0.4L amidships Stringer plate in strength deck (1) Grade E/EH within 0.4L amidships Bilge strake (1) Grade D/DH within 0.4L amidships (1) Single strakes required to be of Class III within 0.4L amidships are to have breadths not less than 800 + 5L (mm), and need not be greater than 1800 (mm), unless limited by the geometry of the ships design Table 4-4: Minimum material grades for BC-A and BC-B ships Structural member category Material Grade Lower bracket of ordinary side frame(1), (2) Grade D/DH Side shell strakes included totally or partially Grade D/DH between the two points located to 0.125 l above and below the intersection of side shell and bilge hopper sloping plate or inner bottom plate (2) (1) The term lower bracket means webs of lower brackets and webs of the lower part of side frames up to the point 0.125 l above the intersection of side shell and bilge hopper sloping plate or inner bottom plate. (2) The span of the side frame, l, is defined as the distance between the supporting structure (See Ch. 3 Sec 6 Fig.19)
2.3.2
Plating materials for stern frames, rudders, rudder horns and shaft brackets are in general not to be of lower grades than corresponding to class II. For rudder and rudder body plates subjected to stress concentrations (e.g. in way of lower support of semi-spade rudders or at upper part of spade rudders) class III is to be applied.
2.3.3
Bedplates of seats for propulsion and auxiliary engines inserted in the inner bottom within 0.6L amidships are to be of class I. In other cases, the steel is to be at least of grade A/AH.
2.3.4
Plating at corners of large hatch openings on decks located below the strength deck, in the case of hatches of holds for refrigerated cargoes, and insert plates at corners of large openings on side shell plating are generally to be of class III. (void)
92 / 97
2.3.5
The steel grade is to correspond to the as-built thickness.
2.3.6
Steel grades of plates or sections of as-built thickness greater than the limiting thicknesses in Table 3 are considered by the Society on a case by case basis.
2.3.7
In specific cases, such as [2.3.8], with regard to stress distribution along the hull girder, the classes required within 0.4L amidships may be extended beyond that zone, on a case by case basis.
2.3.8
The material classes required for the strength deck plating, the sheerstrake and the upper strake of longitudinal bulkheads within 0.4L amidships are to be maintained for an adequate length across the poop front and at the ends of the bridge, where fitted.
2.3.9
Rolled products used for welded attachments of length greater than 0.15L on outside of hull plating, such as gutter bars, are to be of the same grade as that used for the hull plating in way.
2.3.10
In the case of full penetration welded joints located in positions where high local stresses may occur perpendicular to the continuous plating, the Society may, on a case by case basis, require the use of rolled products having adequate ductility properties in the through thickness direction, such as to prevent the risk of lamellar tearing (Z type steel).
93 / 97
Technical Background For Rule Change Notice No. 2-13 Use of steel grades for hull member
Notes: (1) (2)
These Rule Changes enter into force on 1st July 2010. The Technical Background For Rule Change Notice should be read in conjunction with the July 2008 consolidated edition of Bulk Carriers CSR.
Copyright in these Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers is owned by: American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas China Classification Society Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Korean Register of Shipping Lloyd's Register Nippon Kaiji Kyokai Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Copyright 2006
The IACS members, their affiliates and subsidiaries and their respective officers, employees or agents are, individually and collectively, referred to in this clause as the IACS Members. The IACS Members, individually and collectively, assume no responsibility and shall not be liable to any person for any loss, damage or expense caused by reliance on the information or advice in this document or howsoever provided, unless that person has signed a contract with the relevant IACS Member entity for the provision of this information or advice and in that case any responsibility or liability is exclusively on the terms and conditions set out in that contract.
95 / 97
This document gives the technical background of the Rule Change Notice No. 2-13 of the July 2008 edition of the Common Structural Rules for Bulk Carriers.
96 / 97
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
2.1
2.2
Ch 3 Sec 1 [2.3.4]
This paragraph is deleted.
2.3
Ch 3 Sec 1 [2.3.9]
The applicable role products welded attachment is clarified to that with length more than 0.15L and fitted to outside of hull plating.
2.4
Others
The correction is made for the paragraph number and reference due to the deletion of [2.3.4].
Impact on Scantling
There is no scantling impact due to this change but steel grade is affected. The steel grade of side shell for single side skin BC and of outer shell of ships with ice strengthening is enhanced, but as IACS UR S6 Rev. 5 is already implemented by all Class, the effect due to this change is ignored.
97 / 97